Kenwood Car Stereo System TS 480HX User Manual

INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
AF  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
TF-SET  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
SQL  
MULTI  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
A / B  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
AGC  
SCAN  
HF/ 50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER  
TS-480HX  
TS-480SAT  
NOTIFICATION  
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
The use of the warning symbol means the equipment is subject to restrictions of  
use in certain countries.  
This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in the countries as  
below.  
AT BE DK  
LU NL NO PT  
HU LV LT MT  
FI  
FR DE GR  
ES SE CH GB CY CZ EE  
PL SK SI BG RO  
IS  
IE  
IT  
LI  
ISO3166  
© B62-1735-30 (K, E)  
09 08 07 06 05 04 03  
NOTICE TO THE USER  
BEFORE STARTING  
One or more of the following statements may be  
applicable for this equipment.  
Amateur radio regulations vary from country to  
country. Confirm your local amateur radio regulations  
and requirements before operating the transceiver.  
FCC WARNING  
Depending on the size and type of vehicle, the  
maximum transmission output power for the mobile  
operation will vary. The maximum transmission  
output power is usually specified by the car  
manufacturer to avoid interference with other electric  
devices used in the vehicle. Consult your car  
manufacturer and amateur radio equipment dealer for  
the requirements and installation.  
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.  
Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful  
interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in  
the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to  
operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or  
modification is made.  
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED  
BY THE FCC  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that the  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer for technical assistance.  
THANK YOU  
THANK YOU  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES  
Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-480HX/  
SAT transceiver. It has been developed by a team of  
engineers determined to continue the tradition of  
excellence and innovation in KENWOOD  
transceivers.  
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the  
items listed in the table below. We recommend you  
keep the box and packing materials in case you need  
to repack the transceiver in the future.  
Quantity  
This transceiver features a Digital Signal Processing  
(DSP) unit to process AF signals. By taking  
maximum advantage of DSP technology, the  
TS-480HX/ SAT transceiver gives you enhanced  
interference reduction capabilities and improves the  
quality of audio. You will notice the differences when  
you fight QRM and QRN. As you learn how to use  
this transceiver, you will also find that KENWOOD is  
pursuing “user friendliness”. For example, each time  
you change the Menu No. in Menu mode, you will see  
scrolling messages on the display that tell you what  
you are selecting.  
Accessory  
Part Number TS-480SAT TS-480HX  
K
E
K
E
Microphone  
T91-0638-XX  
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
DC power cable E30-3489-XX  
mini DIN plug  
E57-0404-XX  
(6-pin male)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
mini DIN plug  
E57-0405-XX  
(8-pin male)  
Modular cable  
E30-3488-XX  
(RJ-11 4 m)  
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically  
sophisticated and some features may be new to you.  
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from  
the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through  
the learning process now, then act as a reference in  
the coming years.  
Modular cable  
E30-3500-XX  
(RJ-11 20 cm)  
Fuse (25 A)  
Fuse (4 A)  
F05-2531-XX  
F06-4027-XX  
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
Screw Set for  
brackets (A)  
N99-2035-XX  
1
1
1
1
FEATURES  
L-bracket  
J29-0706-XX  
J29-0663-XX  
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
All mode operation from HF to 50 MHz amateur  
radio band  
Panel holder  
Panel bracket  
(mobile)  
J29-0707-XX  
J09-0409-XX  
L79-1408-XX  
L79-1417-XX  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Separate Remote Control panel for mobile  
operation  
Panel bracket  
(base)  
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit  
Adjustable DSP filter frequencies  
Line filter with a  
retaining band  
Line filter for  
Panel  
A built-in Antenna Tuner for the HF/ 50 MHz band  
(TS-480SAT)  
200 watts1 output power (SSB, CW, FSK, FM)  
and 50 watts2 output power (AM) for the  
TS-480HX.  
Portable bracket J29-0705-XX  
Carrying handle K01-0420-XX  
1
1
1
1
Screw set for  
Portable bracket N99-2041-XX  
(B)  
1 50 MHz band: 100 watts  
2 50 MHz band: 25 watts  
1
1
100 watts output power (SSB, CW, FSK, FM) and  
25 watts output power (AM) for the TS-480SAT.  
B62-1735-XX E  
B62-1750-XX F  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B62-1752-XX S  
Instruction  
Manual  
B62-1736-XX G –  
B62-1751-XX I  
B62-1753-XX D  
B52-0619-XX  
Schematic/  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Block Diagrams B52-0620-XX  
Warranty card  
i
THANK YOU  
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL  
The models listed below are covered by this manual.  
TS-480HX : HF/ 50 MHz All mode Transceiver  
(200 watts1 output power: SSB, CW,  
FSK, FM/ 50 watts2 output power:  
AM)  
1 50 MHz band: 100 watts  
2 50 MHz band: 25 watts  
TS-480SAT : HF/ 50 MHz All mode Transceiver with  
Automatic Antenna Tuner (100 watts  
output power: SSB, CW, FSK, FM/  
25 watts output power: AM)  
MARKET CODES  
K-type  
:
The Americas  
E-type  
:
Europe/ General  
The market code is shown on the carton box.  
Refer to the specifications {page 91} for information  
on the available operating frequencies.  
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED  
The writing conventions described below have been  
followed to simplify instructions and avoid  
unnecessary repetition.  
Instruction  
Press [KEY].  
Press  
What to Do  
Press and release KEY.  
Press KEY1 momentarily, release  
[KEY1], [KEY2]. KEY1, then press KEY2.  
Press  
Press and hold KEY down for a  
[KEY] (1 s).  
second and then release KEY.  
Press and hold KEY1 down, then  
press KEY2. If there are more  
than two keys, press and hold  
down each key in turn until the  
final key has been pressed.  
Press  
[KEY1]+[KEY2].  
With the transceiver OFF, press  
and hold KEY, then switch ON  
the transceiver power by pressing  
Press  
[KEY]+[  
].  
[
] (POWER).  
ii  
PRECAUTIONS  
Please observe the following precautions to prevent  
fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:  
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources  
such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other  
devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.  
Connect the transceiver only to a power source  
described in this manual or as marked on the  
transceiver itself.  
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint  
thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet  
of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm  
water or a mild detergent.  
Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power  
cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched  
by items placed near or against the cables. Pay  
particular attention to locations near AC  
receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to  
the transceiver.  
Disconnect the input power cable from the power  
source when the transceiver is not used for long  
periods of time.  
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do  
accessory installations described in this manual or  
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions  
carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar  
with this type of work, seek assistance from an  
experienced individual, or have a professional  
technician do the task.  
Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the  
transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal  
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into  
the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in  
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to  
insert any objects into the transceiver.  
Do not attempt to defeat methods used for  
grounding and electrical polarization in the  
transceiver, particularly involving the power input  
cable.  
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the  
following cases:  
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.  
b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the  
transceiver.  
Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this  
transceiver using approved methods. Grounding  
helps protect against voltage surges caused by  
lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up  
of static charge.  
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.  
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or  
performance has seriously degraded.  
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the  
enclosure damaged.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
Do not attempt to perform any kind of  
configuration or menu setup configuration while  
driving your car.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
Do not wear headphones while driving.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
Install the transceiver in a safe and convenient  
position inside of your vehicle so as not to subject  
yourself to danger while driving. Consult your car  
dealer for the transceiver installation to ensure  
safety.  
GROUNDING  
CONDUCTORS  
GROUND CLAMPS  
ELECTRIC SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
POWER SERVICE  
GROUNDING ELECTRODE  
SYSTEM  
HF/ 50 MHz mobile antennas are larger and  
heavier than VHF/ UHF antennas. Therefore, use  
a strong and rigid mount to safety and securely  
install the HF/ 50 MHz mobile antenna.  
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor  
antenna from power lines is one and one-half  
times the vertical height of the associated antenna  
support structure. This distance allows adequate  
clearance from the power lines if the support  
structure fails for any reason.  
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with  
its ventilation. Do not place books or other  
equipment on the transceiver that may impede the  
free movement of air. Allow a minimum of  
10 cm (4 inches) between the rear of the  
transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf.  
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources  
of moisture. For example, avoid use near a  
bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp  
basement or attic.  
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is  
often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the  
power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact  
a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for  
advice.  
iii  
CONTENTS  
NOTICE TO USER  
MULTI-FUNCTION METER ................................... 20  
BEFORE STARTING  
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 20  
SELECTING TRANSMISSION POWER ............ 20  
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 21  
THANK YOU............................................................. i  
FEATURES............................................................... i  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ..................................... i  
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL ................. ii  
MARKET CODES .................................................... ii  
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED ................. ii  
PRECAUTIONS.......................................................iii  
CONTENTS............................................................ iv  
CHAPTER 5  
MENU SETUP  
WHAT IS A MENU?................................................ 22  
MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 22  
MENU ACCESS .................................................... 22  
QUICK MENU........................................................ 22  
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU ............... 22  
USING THE QUICK MENU ............................... 22  
CHAPTER 1  
INSTALLATION  
MOBILE INSTALLATION ......................................... 1  
INSTALLATION EXAMPLE .................................. 1  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION ..... 1  
DC POWER CABLE CONNECTION.................... 2  
ANTENNA CONNECTION ................................... 2  
IGNITION NOISE ................................................ 2  
MENU CONFIGURATION ..................................... 23  
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST......................... 26  
CHAPTER 6  
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
SSB TRANSMISSION ........................................... 27  
FM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 27  
FIXED STATION INSTALLATION............................. 3  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION .... 3  
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ................. 3  
ANTENNA CONNECTION ................................... 4  
GROUND CONNECTION.................................... 4  
LIGHTNING PROTECTION ................................. 4  
AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 28  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM ......................... 28  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM ......................... 28  
CW TRANSMISSION ............................................ 29  
AUTO ZERO-BEAT ........................................... 29  
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 29  
PORTABLE BRACKET (E-TYPE ONLY) .................. 5  
FUSES .................................................................... 5  
PANEL AND MICROPHONE  
CHAPTER 7  
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
CONNECTION .................................................... 6  
PANEL AND MICROPHONE CONNECTION  
USING PG-4Z (OPTION) ..................................... 6  
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ........................ 30  
TF-SET  
(TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY SET) .............. 30  
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS  
FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 31  
TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 32  
Activating the Tone Function ......................... 32  
Selecting a Tone Frequency.......................... 32  
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 32  
TX/ RX UNIT  
Micropohone (MIC) ......................................... 7  
External Speaker (EXT.SP) ............................. 7  
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) ................... 7  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL  
FM CTCSS OPERATION....................................... 33  
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN ................................... 33  
Headphones (PHONES) ................................. 7  
CHAPTER 2  
YOUR FIRST QSO  
CHAPTER 8  
COMMUNICATING AIDS  
RECEPTION............................................................ 8  
TRANSMISSION ..................................................... 9  
RECEPTION.......................................................... 34  
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY .................... 34  
Direct Frequency Entry ................................. 34  
Using the MHz key........................................ 34  
Quick QSY.................................................... 34  
Configuring the Tuning control as  
CHAPTER 3  
GETTING ACQUAINTED  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL ................................. 10  
LCD DISPLAY ....................................................... 13  
TX/ RX UNIT.......................................................... 15  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (REAR) .................... 17  
MICROPHONE ...................................................... 17  
MULTI control (FM) ....................................... 34  
Fine Tuning................................................... 35  
Tuning control adjustment rate ...................... 35  
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 35  
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)..... 35  
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 35  
CHAPTER 4  
OPERATING BASICS  
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF ............................. 18  
TRANSMISSION ................................................... 36  
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 36  
Microphone Input Level................................. 36  
Delay Time ................................................... 36  
Anti-VOX Adjustment .................................... 36  
VOX Source ................................................. 36  
SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 37  
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 37  
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMISSION SIGNAL  
ADJUSTING VOLUME .......................................... 18  
AF (AUDIO FREQUENCY) GAIN....................... 18  
RF (RADIO FREQUENCY) GAIN ...................... 18  
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ............................. 18  
SELECTING A BAND ............................................ 19  
SELECTING A MODE ............................................ 19  
ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 19  
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 19  
CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 38  
iv  
CONTENTS  
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM) ..................... 38  
TX Equalizer (SSB/ FM/ AM)......................... 38  
TRANSMIT INHIBIT........................................... 38  
BUSY LOCKOUT .............................................. 38  
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE  
STORING DATA IN MEMORY ........................... 50  
Simplex Channels ......................................... 50  
Split-Frequency Channels ............................. 51  
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 51  
Memory Recall.............................................. 51  
Memory Scroll............................................... 52  
Temporary Frequency Changes .................... 52  
MEMORY TRANSFER ...................................... 52  
Memory VFO Transfer .............................. 52  
Channel Channel Transfer ........................ 52  
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES ................... 53  
Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................ 53  
Programmable VFO ...................................... 54  
MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT....................... 54  
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................... 54  
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME ............................. 54  
TRANSMITTING................................................ 38  
CW BREAK-IN....................................................... 39  
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR  
FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 39  
ELECTRONIC KEYER .......................................... 39  
CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 39  
AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 39  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio ....................... 39  
BUG KEY FUNCTION ....................................... 40  
CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 40  
Storing CW Messages .................................. 40  
Checking CW Messages without  
QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 55  
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY .................... 55  
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ..... 55  
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES .......... 55  
QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER .............. 55  
Transmitting .................................................. 40  
Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 40  
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time .... 41  
Changing the Sidetone Volume ..................... 41  
Inset Keying.................................................. 41  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW ............ 41  
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE ............................ 41  
MIC UP/ DWN KEY PADDLE MODE ................. 41  
SWAP DOT AND DASH PADDLE POSTION ..... 41  
CHAPTER 12  
SCAN  
NORMAL SCAN .................................................... 56  
VFO SCAN ........................................................ 56  
PROGRAM SCAN ............................................. 56  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED.......... 57  
SCAN HOLD ..................................................... 57  
CHAPTER 9  
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS  
RADIO TELETYPE (RTTY) .................................... 42  
MEMORY SCAN.................................................... 58  
SCAN RESUME METHOD ................................ 58  
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 58  
GROUP SCAN .................................................. 59  
Memory Group ............................................. 59  
Scan Group Select........................................ 59  
Performing Group Scan ................................ 59  
AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31 ........ 43  
PACKET RADIO .................................................... 43  
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE ............................... 44  
CHAPTER 10  
REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
IF FILTER .............................................................. 45  
CHANGING THE IF FILTER BANDWIDTH ........ 45  
SSB/ AM ....................................................... 45  
CW/ FSK ...................................................... 45  
FM ................................................................ 45  
IF SHIFT (SSB/ CW/ FSK) ................................. 45  
CHAPTER 13  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
ANTENNAS ........................................................... 60  
APO (Auto Power OFF) ......................................... 60  
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ........................... 60  
PRESETTING ................................................... 61  
EXTERNAL ANTENNA TUNER TYPE ............... 61  
DSP FILTERS  
CHANGING THE DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH .... 46  
SSB/ FM/ AM ................................................ 46  
CW/ FSK ...................................................... 46  
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ FM/ AM) .......................... 47  
NOISE REDUCTION (ALL MODES) .................. 47  
Setting the NR1 Level Adjustment ................. 47  
Settign the NR2 Time Constant ..................... 47  
ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 61  
AUTO MODE ......................................................... 61  
BEEP FUNCTION.................................................. 62  
DISPLAY ............................................................... 63  
BRIGHTNESS ................................................... 63  
KEY ILLUMINATION .......................................... 63  
NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 47  
DIGITAL NOISE LIMITER (DNL) ............................ 47  
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL ............................ 63  
DSP FILTER FOR DATA COMMUNICATION  
LOCK FUNCTIONS ............................................... 63  
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ...................... 63  
TUNING CONTROL LOCK FUNCTION ............. 63  
(SSB/ FM) .............................................................. 48  
DSP RX MONITOR................................................ 48  
PRE-AMPLIFIER ................................................... 49  
ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 49  
CW REVERSE ...................................................... 49  
MICROPHONE PF KEYS ...................................... 64  
PF KEY.................................................................. 64  
RX DSP EQUALIZER ............................................ 64  
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO..................... 64  
CHAPTER 11  
MEMORY FEATURES  
RX MONITOR........................................................ 64  
MEMORY CHANNELS .......................................... 50  
v
CONTENTS  
TIME-OUT TIMER ................................................. 65  
YF-107C/ CN/ SN IF FILTERS AND  
SO-3 TCXO ........................................................... 81  
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION ..... 82  
TRANSVERTER .................................................... 65  
FREQUENCY DISPLAY .................................... 65  
TRANSMISSION OUTPUT POWER.................. 65  
CHAPTER 16  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
TX MONITOR ........................................................ 65  
TX POWER ........................................................... 65  
TX TUNE ............................................................... 66  
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................... 83  
SERVICE........................................................... 83  
SERVICE NOTE ................................................ 83  
CLEANING ........................................................ 83  
QUICK DATA TRANSFER ..................................... 67  
SETTING UP ..................................................... 67  
Equipment Needed ....................................... 67  
Connections ................................................. 67  
USING QUICK TRANSFER ............................... 67  
Transferring Data .......................................... 67  
Receiving Data ............................................. 67  
BACKUP BATTERY ............................................... 83  
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................... 84  
MICROPROCESSOR RESET ............................... 88  
INITIAL SETTINGS ............................................ 88  
PARTIAL RESET ............................................... 88  
FULL RESET ..................................................... 88  
COMPUTER CONTROL ........................................ 68  
SETTING UP ..................................................... 68  
Equipment Needed ....................................... 68  
Connections ................................................. 68  
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ................... 68  
CONTROLLING THE TS-480 FROM PC ........... 68  
REMOTE CONTROLLING THE TS-480  
DEMONSTRATION MODE .................................... 88  
OPERATION NOTICES ......................................... 89  
DC POWER SUPPLY ........................................ 89  
FAN NOISES ..................................................... 89  
INTERNAL BEATS ............................................ 89  
AGC .................................................................. 89  
60 m BAND OPERATION  
ON THE NETWORK .......................................... 68  
(K-TYPE/ USA ONLY) ........................................ 89  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE AND STORAGE UNIT  
(OPTIONAL) .......................................................... 68  
RECORDING MESSAGES ................................ 68  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK ..................................... 69  
Checking Messages ..................................... 69  
Sending Messages ....................................... 69  
Erasing a Recorded Message ....................... 69  
Changing Inter-message Interval Time .......... 69  
Changing Playback Volume .......................... 69  
CONSTANT RECORDING ................................ 69  
VOICE GUIDE ................................................... 70  
Voice Guide Announcement Volume ............. 71  
Voice Guide Announcement Speed............... 71  
CHAPTER 17  
OPTIONALACCESSORIES .................................. 90  
CHAPTER 18 SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 91  
CHAPTER 19 INDEX  
INDEX ................................................................... 93  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE ............................... 72  
SKY COMMAND II (K-TYPE ONLY) ...................... 73  
SKY COMMAND II DIAGRAM ........................... 73  
PREPARATION ................................................. 73  
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 73  
USING THE TH-D7AAS A COMMANDER ......... 74  
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 74  
CHAPTER 14  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
COMPUTER .......................................................... 76  
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER .............................. 76  
RTTY OPERATION................................................ 77  
HF/ 50 MHz LINEAR AMPLIFIER .......................... 77  
ANTENNA TUNER ................................................ 78  
MCP AND TNC ...................................................... 78  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE ............................... 79  
CROSSBAND REPEATER .................................... 79  
SKY COMMAND II (K-TYPE ONLY) ...................... 80  
CHAPTER 15 INSTALLING OPTIONS  
REMOVING THE TOP COVER ............................. 81  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE AND STORAGE UNIT ........ 81  
vi  
INSTALLATION  
MOBILE INSTALLATION  
When you use this transceiver for mobile operation, do not attempt to perform any kind of configuration or menu  
setup configuration while driving your car; it is simply too dangeous. Stop the car and then perform transceiver  
configuration. In addition, do not wear headphones while driving.  
You should install the transceiver in a safe and convenient position inside your vehicle so as not to subject  
yourself to danger while driving. For example, install the transceiver under the dash in front of the passenger seat  
so that knees or legs will not strike the transceiver if you brake suddenly. Additionally, do not install the  
transceiver and its accessories on to the air bag lids. We recommend you consult your car dealer for the  
transceiver installation to ensure safety.  
INSTALLATION EXAMPLE  
1 Attach the 2 L-brackets using the 6 supplied SEMS screws (M4 x 10 mm) as shown below.  
2 Position the transceiver in the mounting bracket and tighten the 4 supplied tapping screws (5 mm x 16 mm) to  
fix the transceiver in place.  
Tapping screw  
(5 mm x 16 mm)  
Flat washer  
(5 mm)  
EXT  
.SP  
D
ATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
P
ANEL  
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
SEMS screw  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
L-bracket  
Do not install the TX/ RX unit in non-ventilated areas. Air must flow through the TX/ RX unit to keep the unit cooled.  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION  
1 Peel off the adhesive tape cover from the bottom of the fan-shaped base.  
2 Afix the holder to the vehicle with 4 tapping screws.  
3 Attach the Remote Control panel holder to the base with 2 supplied SEMS screws.  
Tapping screw  
4 mm x 12 mm  
Flat washer (4 mm)  
Remote Control  
panel holder  
SEMS screws  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
Adhesive tape cover  
1
1 INSTALLATION  
DC POWER CABLE CONNECTION  
Place the DC cable the wall of the engine compartment  
securely. Avoid applying excessive heat, vapor and water to  
the cable.  
Connect the DC power cable directly to the vehicle’s  
battery terminals using the shortest route. Do not use  
the cigarette lighter socket! The current rating of the  
cigarette lighter socket is too small to operate the  
transceiver. Ensure to use a 12 V vehicle battery  
which has sufficient current capacity. If the current is  
insufficient, the display may darken during  
Engine compartment  
Red (+)  
AT  
Passenger  
1
2
Compartment  
DC  
2
13.8V  
Black (—)  
1
D
D  
DC  
.8V  
13.8V  
Body  
DC IN  
transmission or the trasceiver may work  
12 V battery  
Use  
a
rubber or plastic grommet so that the cable  
TS-480SAT  
intermittiently. If you use the transceiver for a long  
period when the vehicle battery has not been fully  
charged or when the engine has been stopped, the  
battery may become discharged in a short time and  
will not have sufficient reserves to start the engine.  
Avoid using the transceiver under these conditions.  
Keep in mind that the TS-480SAT transceiver draws a  
peak current of approximately 20.5 A and the  
TS-480HX transceiver draws a peak current of  
approximately 41A (20.5A + 20.5A) during  
does not directly touch the vehicle chassis.  
Place the DC cable the wall of the engine compartment  
securely. Avoid applying excessive heat, vapor and water to  
the cable.  
Engine compartment  
Red (+)  
AT  
Passenger  
Compartment  
1
2
2
13.8V  
1
ND  
DC  
13.8V  
Black (–)  
Body  
DC IN 2  
DC IN 1  
transmission.  
Attach the line filter(s) to the DC cable(s) as  
shown after the installation (E-type only).  
12 V battery  
Use  
a
rubber or plastic grommet so that the cable  
TS-480HX  
E-type only  
does not directly touch the vehicle chassis.  
Note:  
Do not use two separate batteries to connect each DC cables  
from the transceiver (TS-480HX). The DC voltage difference  
between DC IN 1 and DC IN 2 connectors at the transceiver must  
be within DC 1.0 V to operate the transceiver.  
Two supplied DC cables (or two optional PG-20 DC cables) must  
be used. Using different length and/ or different gauged cable  
could result in a voltage difference between DC IN 1 and DC IN 2  
connectors at the transceiver (TS-480HX).  
ANTENNA CONNECTION  
In general, HF/ 50 MHz mobile antennas are larger and heavier than VHF/ UHF antennas. Therefore, use a  
strong and rigid mount to safety and securely install the HF/ 50 MHz mobile antenna.  
A bumper mount is recommended for stable mounting. However, most recent models of vehicles have plastic  
bumpers. For such vehicles, ground the antenna mount to the body chassis with a large wire. Antenna  
installation is critical for successful mobile operation. For further information, refer to The Radio Amateur’s  
Handbook, Radio Handbook, or other published texts.  
GROUND CONNECTION  
The ground, which is the other half of the antenna system, is very important when using a mobile whip type  
antenna. Connect the feed line ground for the antenna securely to the vehicle’s chassis, and be certain to bond  
(electrically connect) the vehicle’s body to chassis. The sheet metal will provide the primary ground plane, so be  
sure to establish a good RF connection from the feed line to both the chassis and the body. For comprehensive  
information on mobile antennas installations and optimization, refer to the ARRL Handbook or similar publications.  
IGNITION NOISE  
This transceiver has been equipped with a Noise Blanker and Digital Noise Limiter to filter ignition noises out.  
However, some cars may generate excessive ignition noise. If there is excessive noise, use suppressor spark  
plugs (with resisters), and/ or DC line filters to reduce the electric noises. The ARRL Handbook, or similar  
refereneces, has a wealth of information regarding this topic.  
Note:  
After installation and wiring are completed, confirm that all work has been done correctly, then connect the DC power cable plug(s) to the  
transceiver.  
If the fuse blows, disconnect the DC power cable plug(s) from the transceiver immediately, then check all the DC power cables to find the  
reasons of the short circuit. The DC cable may be damaged, short circuited, pinched, or squashed. After resolving the problem, replace the  
fuse with one of the same type and rating.  
Do not remove the fuse holder for any reason.  
2
1 INSTALLATION  
FIXED STATION INSTALLATION  
When you use the transceiver at a fixed location, the transceiver requires 13.8 V DC power supply  
(The TS-480HX requires 2 DC power supplies).  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION  
1 Attach the oval-shaped base to the front panel mounting bracket using two SEMS screws (M4 x 10 mm) as  
shown below.  
2 Slide the Remote Control panel along the mounting bracket rails until secure.  
SEMS screw  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
Panel holder  
SEMS screw  
Base stand  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION  
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate 13.8 V DC power supply (two 13.8 V/ 20.5 A or single  
13.8 V/ 41.0 A DC power supply(s) is required to transmit for the TS-480HX) that must be purchased separately.  
Do not directly connect the transceiver to an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cables to connect the  
transceiver to a regulated power supply. Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires. The current capacity  
of each power supply must be 20.5 A peak or more.  
1 Connect the DC power cable(s) to the regulated DC power supply (two 13.8 V/ 20.5 A or single 13.8 V/ 41.0 A  
DC power supply(s) must be used for the TS-480HX); the red lead to the positive terminal and the black lead to  
the negative terminal.  
When using a single 13.8 V/ 41 A DC power supply, connect 2 DC cables to the positive and negative  
terminals, as shown on page 2.  
2 Connect the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC power connector.  
Press the connectors firmly until the locking tab clicks.  
Attach the line filter(s) to the DC cable(s) as shown below (E-type only).  
Note:  
Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver, be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and the transceiver.  
Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you make all connections.  
When two power supplies are used for the TS-480HX, the DC voltage difference at the transceiver DC IN connectors must be within 1.0 V DC.  
Do not use different types (length and gauge) of DC cables to avoid voltage differences (TS-480HX).  
Fuse (25 A)  
E-type only  
Red (+)  
Fuse (25 A)  
Red (+)  
Fuse (25 A)  
Black (–)  
Black (—)  
Red (+)  
AT  
AT  
1
2
1
2
C  
2
13.8V  
DC  
2
13.8V  
1
ND  
DC  
13.8V  
1
ND  
DC  
13.8V  
DC IN 2  
DC 13.8 V  
DC IN 1  
DC 13.8 V  
DC Power supply  
(20.5 A or more)  
DC IN 1  
DC 13.8 V  
DC Power supply  
(20.5 A or more)  
DC Power supply  
(20.5 A or more)  
TS-480SAT  
TS-480HX  
3
1 INSTALLATION  
ANTENNA CONNECTION  
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line, and ground. The transceiver can give excellent results if the  
antenna system and its installation are given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50 antenna of good  
quality, a high-quality 50 coaxial cable, and first-quality connectors. All connections must be clean and tight.  
After making the connections, match the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is 1.5:1 or  
less. High SWR will cause the transmit output to drop and may lead to radio frequency interference to consumer  
products such as stereo receivers and televisions. You may even interfere with your own transceiver. Reports  
that your signal is distorted could indicate that your antenna system is not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s  
power.  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed line to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you are using two  
HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the secondary antenna to ANT 2. Refer to page 16 for the location of the antenna  
connectors.  
Note:  
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other matched load may damage the transceiver. Always connect the antenna to the  
transceiver before transmitting.  
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and transceiver damage.  
The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the SWR is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection to compensate for a  
poorly functioning antenna system.  
GROUND CONNECTION  
At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior  
communications results, a good RF ground is required against which the antenna system can operate. Both of  
these conditions can be met by providing a good earth ground for your station. Bury one or more ground rods or  
a large copper plate under the ground, then connect this to the transceiver GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire  
or a copper strap, cut as short as possible, for this connection. Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a  
plastic water pipe as a ground.  
LIGHTNING PROTECTION  
Even in areas where lightning storms are less common, there are usually a limited number of storms each year.  
Consider carefully how to protect your equipment and home from lightning. The installation of a lightning arrestor  
is a start, but there is more that you can do. For example, terminate your antenna system transmission lines at an  
entry panel that you install outside your home. Ground this entry panel to a good outside ground, then connect  
the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,  
disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will ensure additional protection.  
4
1 INSTALLATION  
PORTABLE BRACKET (E-TYPE ONLY)  
Using the supplied Portable Bracket, you can carry the Remote Control panel and TX/ RX unit together.  
Two TX/ RX unit positions are available. If you do not use the EXT.SP, REMOTE and DATA connectors, place the  
TX/ RX unit in front position. If you use the EXT.SP, REMOTE or DATA connector, place the TX/ RX unit to the  
back position. You can also attach the handle as shown if necessary. Use the supplied short cable (RJ11/ 20 cm)  
to connect the Remote Control panel and the TX/ RX unit.  
Binding head screw  
(M4 x 8 mm)  
RJ11/ 20 cm  
SEMS screw  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
SEMS screw  
(M4 x 10 mm)  
AT  
1
2
DC  
2
13.8V  
1
ND  
DC  
13.8V  
Flat-head screw  
(M4 x 12 mm)  
Carrying handle  
FUSES  
The following fuses are used in the TS-480HX/ SAT transceiver. If a fuse blows, determine the cause then correct  
the problem. Only after the problem has been resolved, replace the blown fuse with a new one with the specified  
ratings. If newly installed fuses continue to blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a KENWOOD service  
center or your dealer for assistance.  
Fuse Location  
Fuse Current Rating  
1 Remove 7 screws at the bottom of the TX/ RX unit.  
2 Remove 8 screws inside of the TX/ RX unit.  
3 Lift the shield cover.  
TS-480HX/ SAT  
(TX/ RX unit)  
4 A  
(For an external antenna tuner)  
Supplied DC power  
cable  
25 A  
4 Replace 4 A fuse.  
K E Y  
A P D D L E  
K E Y  
D D L E  
P A  
C O M  
C O M  
A N E L  
P
A N E L  
P
M I C  
M I C  
R E M O T E  
A T A  
R E M O T E  
D
A T A  
D
. S P  
E X T  
. S P  
E X T  
5
1 INSTALLATION  
PANEL AND MICROPHONE CONNECTION  
Plug the microphone plug to the MIC jack (8-wire/ RJ45), then connect the Remote Control panel to the TX/ RX  
unit with the supplied cable (2 m/ 6-wire/ RJ11).  
Microphone  
OTE  
MIC  
P
A
To MIC  
3cm  
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
To PANEL  
Line filter  
PANEL AND MICROPHONE CONNECTION USING PG-4Z (OPTION)  
Use the cables and connectors to connect the Remote Control panel and TX/ RX unit with the PG-4Z cable kit as  
shown below.  
T  
MOTE  
Extension cable (RJ45)  
from the PG-4Z cable kit  
Extension adaptor (RJ45)  
from the PG-4Z cable kit  
EXT  
.SP  
To MIC  
DA  
T
A
REMOTE  
IC  
P
ANEL  
3 cm  
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
To external speaker  
Line filter (large) from  
the PG-4Z cable kit  
To EXT.SP  
3 cm  
Line filter (small) from  
the TS-480  
1 cm  
External speaker extension  
cable from the PG-4Z cable  
kit (when the external speaker  
is used)  
Extension cable (RJ11)  
from the PG-4Z cable kit  
Line filter (small) from  
the PG-4Z cable kit  
Extension adaptor (RJ11)  
from the PG-4Z cable kit  
Tapping screw  
(4 mm x 14 mm)  
Flat washer  
Cable  
holder  
Microphone cable  
RJ45 (8-wire)  
adaptor  
Double-sided  
adhesive tape  
6
1 INSTALLATION  
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS  
TX/ RX UNIT  
Microphone (MIC)  
Connect a microphone having an impedance  
between 250 and 600 . As for the supplied  
microphone, fully insert the modular connector into  
the MIC jack until the locking tab clicks. You can  
still utilize 8-pin metal type plug microphones,  
such as MC-43S, MC-47, and MC-60A with the  
optional MJ-88 adaptor (optional) if necessary.  
However, do not use the MC-44, MC-44DM,  
MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM, MC-45DME, or  
MC-53DM condensor-type microphones.  
1
2
3
4
External speaker (Opt.)  
Microphone  
w/ 8-pin metal plug  
(Opt.)  
External Speaker (EXT.SP)  
On the front panel of the TX/ RX unit, there is an  
external speaker jack. If an external speaker is  
connected to EXT.SP jack, the built-in speaker on  
the back of the Remote Control panel will mute.  
Use only external speakers with an impedance of  
4 to 8 (8 nominal). The jacks accept only  
3.5 mm (1/8") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) plugs.  
MJ-88  
(Opt.)  
EXT  
.SP  
D
ATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
P
AN
COM  
The “ ” projection indicates the external  
speaker jack.  
PA  
D
DLE  
KEY  
Note: Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio  
output of this jack could damage your hearing.  
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)  
For CW operation using the internal electronic  
keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE  
jack. For CW operation without using the internal  
electronic keyer, connect a straight key,  
GND dash dot  
GND  
+
Headphones  
semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer, or the  
CW keying output from a Multi-mode  
Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY  
jack. The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a  
3.5 mm (1/8") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm  
(1/8") 2-conductor plug respectively. External  
electronic keyers or MCPs must have a positive  
keying output to be compatible with this  
Straight key  
Bug key  
Electric keyer  
MCP CW output  
Paddle  
transceiver. Use a shielded cable between the  
key and the transceiver.  
The “•” projection indicates the key jack and  
the “••” projection indicates the paddle jack.  
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer, you  
may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another  
type of keyer unless you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW.  
Refer to the “ELECTRONIC KEYER” section {page 39} to  
become familiar with the internal keyer.  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL  
Headphones (PHONES)  
Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a  
4 to 32 impedance. This jack accepts a  
3.5 mm (1/8") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or  
3-conductor (stereo) plug. After connecting the  
headphones, you will hear no sound from the  
internal (or optional external) speaker.  
7
YOUR FIRST QSO  
RECEPTION  
w
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
PF  
ANT 1/2  
t
ATT/PRE  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
AT  
r
TF-SET  
DNL  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
BC  
A / B  
SPLIT  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
qu  
qr  
MHz  
AGC  
SCAN  
y
i
e
Are you ready to give your TS-480HX/ SAT a quick  
try? Reading these two pages should get your voice  
on the air in your first QSO on the HF/ 50 MHz band  
shortly. The instructions below are intended only for  
a quick guide. If you encounter problems or there is  
something you don’t understand, read the detailed  
explanations given later in this manual.  
t Press [ ]/ [ ] to select a desired HF/ 50 MHz  
Amateur radio band.  
y Press [MODE] to select the desired  
communication mode.  
There are 4 mode pairs: USB/ LSB, CW/ CWR  
(Reversed pitch), FSK/ FSR (Reverse shift)  
and AM/ FM. Press [MODE] (1 s) to toggle the  
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to  
briefly try the transceiver.  
mode within each pair: USB  
LSB,  
CW CWR, FSK FSR, or AM  
FM.  
q Set the following as specified:  
To select the alternate mode on each operating  
mode, press and hold the key for 1 second.  
For example, if USB is selected, press  
[MODE] (1 s) to switch to LSB mode. The  
following diagram illustrates how to access  
each mode.  
AF control:  
Fully counterclockwise  
Fully counterclockwise  
SQL control:  
Then, switch ON the DC power supply if you are  
using the DC power supply. If you are operating the  
transceiver with the car batteries, ensure that the DC  
power source(s) are available at the DC connector(s).  
MODE  
(1 s)  
w Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to turn ON  
the transceiver.  
MODE  
Do not press the switch for more than  
approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will  
be switched OFF.  
MODE  
(1 s)  
MODE  
MODE  
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by  
the selected frequency and other indicators.  
(1 s)  
MODE  
MODE  
(1 s)  
MODE  
d
u If you have selected FM, turn the SQL control  
clockwise until the background noise is just  
eliminated; the green LED (above the [MODE]  
key) turns OFF.  
With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.  
e Confirm that VFO A has been selected for  
communications; “  
i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.  
t
A” should be visible on the  
If you do not hear any stations, you may have  
the wrong antenna connector selected. In this  
case, try selecting another antenna by pressing  
and hold [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] (1 s).  
display. If it has not, press [A/B / M/V] to select  
VFO A.  
r Turn the AF control slowly clockwise until you hear  
a suitable level of background noise.  
8
2 YOUR FIRST QSO  
TRANSMISSION  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
MODE  
ti  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
AF  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
we  
TF-SET  
DNL  
BC  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
SQL  
MULTI  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
A / B  
SPLIT  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
SCAN  
MHz  
AGC  
ro  
u
t
q
q Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired  
t Press Mic [PTT].  
The LED lights red.  
station or to select an unused frequency.  
If you are operating the TS-480HX transceiver  
without the AT-300 antenna tuner, continue to  
step 4.  
y Begin speaking into the microphone in your  
normal tone of voice.  
u LSB/ USB: While speaking into the microphone,  
adjust the MULTI control so that the ALC meter  
reflects according to your voice level.  
w Press [AT] momentarily.  
s
AT T” appears.  
e Press and hold [AT] to start tuning the antenna  
tuner (TS-480SAT or TS-480HX with the AT-300  
antenna tuner).  
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI control so that the power meter slightly  
reflects to your voice level.  
t
s
R AT T” starts blinking and the LED above  
FM: Skip this step.  
the [MODE] key turns red.  
i When you finish speaking, release Mic [PTT] to  
Tuning should be completed in under  
20 seconds, then a morse code “T” (a long  
single beep) sounds and “AT T” stops blinking.  
return to receive mode.  
s
o Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to finish adjusting the  
Microphone Gain.  
If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds,  
error beeps sound. Press [AT] to stop the  
error beeps and quit tuning. Check your  
antenna system before continuing. If you do  
not press [AT], tuning will continue for  
approximately 60 seconds.  
Note: If desired, access Menu No. 44 {page 27} to adjust the  
Microphone Gain for FM mode.  
This completes your introduction to the TS-480  
transceiver, but there is a great deal more to know.  
“OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the following  
chapters explain all the functions of this transceiver,  
starting with the most basic, commonly-used  
functions.  
Note:  
You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the  
transceiver or external antenna tuner while the antenna tuner  
is trying to tune the antenna. This is simply the relay  
switches turning ON and OFF.  
When the TS-480HX transceiver is used with the AT-300  
external antenna tuner, the TX output power is automatically  
reduced to 100 watts (AM: 25 watts).  
r With LSB, USB, or AM selected, press  
[MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to adjust the Microphone Gain.  
“MIC -- 50” appears.  
With FM selected, skip this step.  
9
GETTING ACQUAINTED  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL  
q u i o !  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
w
ATT/PRE  
e
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
r
TF-SET  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
A / B  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
SCAN  
t
MHz  
AGC  
y ! ! !  
q [ ] (POWER) switch  
o MIC/ 5/ RF.G key  
Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power  
ON. Press again to switch the power OFF {page 18}.  
Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 27}.  
While the Speech Processor function is ON, press to  
adjust the Speech Processor output level {page 37}.  
Press and hold to adjust the receiver RF gain  
{page 18}.  
w PF key  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key. The default function is VOICE1.  
To use the Voice Guide and Storage functions, the  
optional VGS-1 is required {page 64}.  
! KEY/ 6/ DELAY key  
Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed.  
Press and hold to adjust the VOX delay time {page  
36} or Break-in time (Full Break-in/ Semi Break-in  
time) for CW mode {page 39}.  
e ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2 key  
Press to cycle between receiver attenuator ON, pre-  
amplifier ON and OFF {pages 49, 61}.  
Press and hold for 1 second, then release it to select  
either ANT 1 or ANT 2 {page 60}.  
! NB/T/ 7 key  
r AT  
Press to switch the Noise Blanker ON or OFF. Press  
and hold to adjust the Noise Blanker level {page 47}.  
In FM mode, press to turn the Tone function ON or  
OFF {page 32}. Press and hold to select a sub-audible  
tone for the Tone funtion {page 32}.  
Press to activate the internal antenna tuner {page 60}  
or an external antenna tuner. Press and hold to start  
tuning the automatic antenna tuner.  
t SQL control  
Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, the head  
phones and the AF output on DATA (8-pin mini DIN  
connector) when no receive signal is present on the  
transceiver {page 19}.  
! VOX/ 8 key  
In voice mode, press to turn the VOX (Voice-  
Operated Transmit) function ON or OFF {page 36}.  
In CW mode, press to turn the Break-in function ON  
or OFF {page 39}. Press and hold to adjust the  
microphone input gain for VOX operation. The VOX  
icon appears when the VOX (Voice)/ Break-in (CW)  
function is active.  
y AF control  
Turn to adjust the audio volume on the transceiver  
{page 18}.  
u CH1/ 1/ REC, CH2/ 2/ REC, CH3/ 3/ REC key  
Press to play back the CW or voice messages (the  
VGS-1 is required) {page 40}. Press and hold to  
record the voice messages (the VGS-1 is required)  
{page 68} or CW messages that are associated with  
the internal electronic keyer {page 40}.  
! PROC/ 9 key  
Press to turn the Speech Processor ON or OFF  
{page 37}. Press and hold to adjust the Speech  
Processor input level. The PROC icon appears when  
the Speech Processor function is ON.  
i PWR/ 4/ TX MONI key  
Press to adjust the transmission output power.  
Press and hold to adjust the volume of the  
transmission signal monitor function {page 65}.  
10  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
@
!@ @ @  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
ATT/PRE  
AF  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
TF-SET  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
SQL  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
A / B  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
AGC  
@
! ! ! ! !@ @ @  
@
! MTR/ CLR key  
@ BC/ CW.T key  
Press to select the meter scales {page 20} or exit  
from, abort, or reset various functions. Press and  
hold to clear memory channels {page 54}.  
Press to select the DSP Beat Cancel funtion, BC1  
(Beat Cancel 1), BC2 (Beat Cancel 2) or OFF  
{page 47}. In CW mode, press to start the Auto Zero-  
beat in CW mode {page 29}.  
! AGC/ 0/ OFF key  
@ LED  
Press to toggle the fast or slow response time for the  
Automatic Gain Control (AGC). Press and hold to  
switch the AGC OFF {page 35}.  
Lights red when the transceiver is transmitting, lights  
green when the transceiver is receiving signals, and  
turns OFF when the transceiver mutes with the  
squelch function.  
! ENT key  
Press to enter your desired frequency using the  
keypad {page 34} or lock out memory channels from  
the scan list {page 54}.  
@ MODE key  
Press to change the operating mode pair. There are  
4 pairs: USB/ LSB, CW/ CWR, FSK/ FSR, and AM/ FM.  
Press and hold for a second to toggle the mode  
! FINE/ STEP key  
Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow  
more precise tuning {page 35}. Press and hold to  
select the frequency step size for the MULTI control  
{page 34}.  
within each pair: USB  
FSK FSR, or AM  
LSB, CW  
FM {page 19}.  
CWR,  
@ MENU/ F.LOCK key  
! SCAN/ SG.SEL key  
Press to enter Menu mode {page 22}. Press and hold  
to activate the Frequency Lock function {page 63}.  
Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 56}.  
Press and hold to select a Scan group {page 59}.  
@ MHz key  
! NR key  
Press to turn the MHz Up/ Down function ON or OFF.  
The MHz digit increases or decreases when you turn  
the MULTI control. Press and hold to change the  
increment/ decrement step value {page 34}.  
Press to select the DSP Noise Reduction function,  
NR1, NR2 or OFF {page 47}. When the Noise  
Reduction function is turned ON, press and hold key  
to change the parameter of the Noise Reduction  
function {page 47}.  
@ Tuning control torque adjustment lever  
The lever behind the Tuning control adjusts the  
control torque level; turn clockwise for light torque or  
counterclockwise for heavy torque.  
@ DNL key  
Press to turn the DNL (Digital Noise Limiter) function  
ON or OFF. The “DNL” icon appears when it is ON.  
Press and hold the key to change the level of DNL  
function {page 47}.  
@ Tuning control  
Turn to select the desired frequency {page 19}.  
Use the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous  
tuning.  
@ FIL/ NAR key  
Press to configure the low-cut and high-cut filter  
frequency for the DSP filter (AF). Press and hold to  
select the narrow IF filter if available {page 45}.  
11  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
#
#
#
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
#
#
ATT/PRE  
AF  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
TF-SET  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
SQL  
MULTI  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
QMR  
M/V  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
7
8
9
A / B  
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
#
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
SCAN  
MHz  
AGC  
@## #  
#
@ QMI/ M.IN key  
# CL key  
Press to store data to the Quick Memory. Press and  
hold to store the current operating frequencies and  
other data to the Memory channel.  
Press to clear the RIT/ XIT frequency to zero  
{pages 35, 37}.  
# XIT key  
s
# QMR/ M VFO key  
Press to turn the XIT (Transmit Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 37}. When the XIT  
function is ON, the XIT icon appears.  
Press to recall data from the Quick Memory  
{page 55}. Press and hold to transfer the Memory  
Channel frequencies and other data to the VFO.  
# RIT key  
# A/B / M/V key  
Press to turn the RIT (Receive Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 35}. When the RIT  
function is ON, the RIT icon appears.  
Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 18}.  
Press and hold to toggle between Memory and VFO  
modes.  
# RIT/ XIT control  
# A=B/ SPLIT key  
When the RIT/ XIT function is ON, turn to adjust the  
offset frequency. The RIT/ XIT offset frequency  
appears on the sub-display {pages 35, 37}.  
Press to duplicate the data in the currently selected  
VFO to the other VFO {page 35}. Press and hold to  
enter split-frequency operation which allows you to  
use different transmission and reception frequencies  
{page 30}.  
# MULTI control  
In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency  
up or down {page 34}. In Memory Channel mode,  
rotate to select a Memory Channel {page 51}.  
Also, used for selecting Menu numbers when  
accessing the Menu mode {page 22} and as a  
selector to choose settings for various functions  
activated by Remote Control panel keys.  
# IF SHIFT control  
Rotate to shift the center frequency of the IF passband  
either lower or higher, to remove interference {page  
45}.  
#
/
key  
Normally, press to step through all the Amateur radio  
bands consecutively {page 19}. Also used to make  
selections from the Menu {page 22} and to check the  
Start and End frequencies of the Scan function  
{page 53}. When both the split-frequency and the  
frequency lock function are actived, press and hold to  
perform the TF-SET function {page 30}.  
12  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
LCD DISPLAY  
q w  
e r t y u i o!! !  
! ! ! ! ! !!  
q METER  
!
While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure  
and display the received signal strength. While  
transmitting, serves as a power meter plus an ALC  
meter, an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor  
compression meter. The Peak Hold function holds  
each reading for approximately half a second.  
Appears while the Constant Recording function is  
working {page 69}.  
! NB  
Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON {page 47}.  
! AGC OFF  
t
s
w R AT T  
“AGC - F” (fast) or “AGC” (slow) appears when the  
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) function is ON. “AGC  
OFF” appears when the AGC is OFF {page 35}.  
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 60} or  
an external antenna tuner is in-line for the operation.  
t
s
e 1 ANT 2  
! NAR 2  
Either “1 ANT” or “ANTs2” appears, depending on  
t
“NAR” appears when the narrow IF filter is selected  
for the operating mode. If 2 optional IF filters are  
installed and the transceiver selects the secondary IF  
filter, “NAR 2” appears {page 45}.  
which antenna connector is selected for the operation  
{page 60}.  
r ATT  
! MHz  
Appears when the receiver’s attenuator (approx.  
12 dB) is ON {pages 49, 61}.  
Appears when the MHz Up/ Down mode using the  
MULTI control is ON {page 34}. It also appears when  
the Quick Menu function is ON {page 22}.  
t PRE  
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier (approx.  
6 dB) is ON {page 49}.  
! FINE  
Appears when the Fine function is ON {page 35}.  
y VOX  
!
Appears when the VOX (Voice Operated  
Transmission) function is ON or the Break-in function  
is ON for the CW mode {pages 36, 39}.  
Appears when the selected Menu No. is in the Quick  
Menu list. It also appears when the transceiver is  
scanning the frequencies between the slow down  
frequency points {page 57}.  
u PROC  
Appears when the Speech Processor function is ON  
{page 37}.  
!
Appears when the split-frequency operation is ON  
{page 30}.  
i MENU  
Appears when configuring the parameters in the  
Menu mode {page 22}.  
!
Appears when the Tuning control Lock function is ON  
o
{page 63}.  
Reserved for future updates.  
!
Appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON  
{page 63}.  
13  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
#
#
#
#
@@@ @@ @@@ @@  
#
###  
t
s
@ R EQ T  
@
t
R EQ” appears when the RX Equalizer function is  
The transceiver operating frequency display. In Menu  
mode, it displays the parameters.  
s
ON {page 64}. EQ T” appears when the TX  
Equalizer function is ON {page 38}.  
#
t
s
@1 BC 2  
In the normal operating mode, it displays the  
transceiver status and Menu item descriptions when  
necessary. While the RIT, XIT or SPLIT function is  
turned ON, it is used to display the frequency  
information for these functions {pages 35, 37}.  
t
s
1 BC” or “BC 2” appears, as you select the DSP  
Beat Cancel 1 or Beat Cancel 2 {page 47}.  
t
s
@ 1 NR 2  
t
s
1 NR” or “NR 2” appears, depending on whether  
DSP Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced method) or  
Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC method) is selected  
{page 47}.  
t s  
A
#
t
s
A” or “A ” appears while VFO A is selected  
{pages 18, 30}. A” appears while Menu A is being  
accessed in the Menu mode {page 22}.  
@ M.CH  
t s  
B
#
Appears in Memory Recall mode {page 51}.  
@ M.SCR  
t
s
B” or “B ” appears while VFO B is selected  
{pages 18, 30}. B” appears while Menu B is being  
accessed in the Menu mode {page 22}.  
Appears in Memory Scroll mode {page 52}.  
@ DNL  
t s  
M
#
Appears when the Digital Noise Limiter function is ON  
{page 47}.  
t
s
M” or “M ” appears while a simplex memory  
channel is selected {page 50}.  
@
# RIT  
Shows the Memory Channel number for the  
transceiver. In Menu mode, it displays the Menu No.  
In Quick Memory mode, it shows the Quick Memory  
number location (the Quick Memory number ranges  
from “0_” to “9_”) {page 55}.  
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning function is  
ON {page 35}.  
# XIT  
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning function  
is ON {page 37}.  
@
# CT  
Displays a communication mode {page 19}.  
@ AUTO  
“T” appears when the Tone function is ON {page 32}.  
“CT” appears when the CTCSS (Continuous Tone  
Coded Squelch System) is ON {page 33}.  
Appears when Auto Mode function is ON {page 61}.  
# PC  
Appears when the transceiver is being controlled by a  
PC {page 67}.  
14  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
TX/ RX UNIT  
i
q
w
e r t  
y
EXT.SP  
DATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
PANEL  
COM  
PADDLE  
KEY  
u
q MIC connector  
Connect a cable from the supplied microphone to this  
connector {page 6}.  
w PANEL connector  
Connect a cable from the Remote Control panel to  
this connector {page 6}.  
e EXT.SP jack  
Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plug  
for connecting an external speaker {page 7}.  
r DATA connector  
Mates with a 6-pin male DIN connector for connecting  
various accessory equipment, such as an external  
TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal {pages 77, 78}.  
t REMOTE connector  
Mates with a 6-pin male mini DIN connector for  
connecting an HF/ 50 MHz linear amplifier {page 77}.  
y COM connector  
Mates with a DB-9 female connector for connecting a  
computer via one of its serial communication (COM)  
ports {page 67}. Also used with the Quick Data  
Transfer function {pages 66, 76} and DX  
PacketCluster Tune function {pages 72, 79}.  
u PADDLE and KEY jacks  
The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")  
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the  
internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a  
3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an  
external key for CW operation. Refer to “Keys for  
CW (PANEL and KEY)” {page 7} before using these  
jacks.  
i Plastic cover  
If the EXT.SP jack, DATA connector and REMOTE  
connector are not used, attach this cover to protect  
the connectors from dust.  
15  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
ANT 2 ANT 1  
q
r
e
w
y
t
q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1  
connector. If you are using 2 antennas for the HF/ 50  
MHz band, connect the secondary antenna to the ANT  
2 connector.  
w GND post  
Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between  
the ground post and the nearest earth ground or vehicle  
body {pages 2, 4}.  
e Cooling Fans  
The TS-480SAT is equipped with 1 cooling fan.  
The TS-480HX is equipped with 2 cooling fans.  
Air flows in from these fans.  
r AT connector  
Mates with the connecter from the cable supplied with  
the AT-300 external antenna tuner. Refer to the  
instruction manual supplied with the tuner for more  
information.  
t DC 1 13.8 V DC power input connector  
Connect a primary 13.8 V DC power source to this  
connector {pages 2, 3}. Use the DC cable supplied  
with the transceiver.  
y DC 2 13.8 V DC power input connector  
(TS-480HX only)  
You must connect a secondary 13.8 V DC power  
source to this connector in order to transmit  
{pages 2, 3}. Use the cable supplied with the  
transceiver. If no DC power source is available on  
this connector, you cannot transmit at any output  
power. However, you can still receive {page 18}.  
16  
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (REAR)  
q
q Speaker  
MICROPHONE  
When the headphones are connected, the  
speaker mutes.  
If you wish to use a commercially available 3rd party  
angle or mount, there are 4 screw holes available on  
the rear of the Remote Control panel so that you can  
mount it to the angle or mount. Use 3 mm x 8 mm  
tapping screws to mount the panel securely to the  
angle or mount. (The tapping screws are not  
supplied).  
DWN  
UP  
q
w
PTT  
q PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch  
The transceiver is placed in Transmission mode when  
this non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the  
switch returns the transceiver to Reception mode.  
w UP/ DWN keys  
Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, Memory  
Channels, or Menu selections up and down.  
Press and hold these keys to continuously change  
the settings.  
17  
OPERATING BASICS  
SWITCHING POWER ON/ OFF  
RF (RADIO FREQUENCY) GAIN  
The RF gain is normally configured to the maximum  
level regardless of the operating modes. The  
transceiver has been configured to the maximum  
level at the factory. However, you may decrease the  
RF gain slightly when you have trouble hearing the  
desired signal because of excessive atmospheric  
noise or interference from other stations. First, take  
note of the peak S-meter reading of the desired  
signal.  
1 Switch the DC power supply(s) ON if you are  
using a DC power supply(s).  
2 Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to switch  
the transceiver ON.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
1 Press [MIC/ RF.G] (1 s).  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
Do not press the switch for more than  
approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will  
be switched OFF.  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
TS-480HX only: If “RX ONLY” appears on the  
sub-display upon power up, confirm that two  
DC cable connectors are securely connected to  
the DC-1 and DC-2 connectors. When this  
warning message appears, you can receive  
signals as usual but you cannot transmit even if  
you decrease the output power. “TWIN PWR”  
appears when two DC power cables are  
The current RF gain level appears on the  
sub-display (0: minimum ~ 100: maximum).  
2 Turn the MULTI control counterclockwise until the  
S-meter reads the peak value that you noted.  
connected to the DC-1 and DC-2 connectors.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears on the main  
display, followed by the selected frequency and  
other indicators.  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
3 To switch the transceiver OFF, press [  
]
(POWER) again.  
4 Switch the DC power supply(s) OFF.  
Signals that are weaker than this level will be  
attenuated and reception of the station will  
become easier.  
You may skip step 3. After switching the  
transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON  
using only the power switch of the DC power  
supply(s). The transceiver remembers the  
information of the POWER switch position  
when the DC power source is switched OFF.  
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and  
the condition of the band, adjust the RF gain. When  
using FM mode, always adjust the RF gain to the  
maximum level.  
ADJUSTING VOLUME  
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B  
AF (AUDIO FREQUENCY) GAIN  
Two VFOs are available for controlling the frequency  
on the transceiver. Each VFO (VFO A and VFO B)  
works independently so that a different frequency and  
mode can be selected. For example, when SPLIT  
operation is activated, VFO A is used for reception  
and VFO B is used for transmission. The opposite  
combination is also possible.  
Turn the AF control clockwise to increase the audio  
level and counterclockwise to decrease the level.  
AF  
SQL  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
ATT/PRE  
AF  
Press [A/B / M/V] to toggle between VFO A and B.  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
SQL  
MULTI  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
SCAN  
MHz  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of  
beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW TX sidetone. The audio  
level for Digital mode operation is also independent of the AF control  
setting.  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
t
selected.  
A” or “  
tB” appears to indicate which VFO is  
18  
4 OPERATING BASICS  
SELECTING A BAND  
ADJUSTING SQUELCH  
Press [ ]/ [ ] to select your desired band.  
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker  
when no signals are present. With the squelch level  
correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually  
receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch  
level, the stronger the signals must be to receive.  
The appropriate squelch level depends on the  
ambient RF noise conditions.  
Holding down either key changes the bands  
continuously.  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
Turn the SQL control when there are no signals  
present to select the squelch level at which the  
background noise is just eliminated; the green LED  
will turn off. Many ham operators prefer leaving the  
SQL control fully counterclockwise unless operating  
on a full-carrier mode such as FM. The squelch  
level for the main transceiver is preset at the factory  
to approximately the 9 o’clock position for FM and 11  
o’clock for SSB and AM.  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
SELECTING A MODE  
Press [MODE] to cycle through the 4 mode pairs:  
USB/ LSB, CW/ CWR, FSK/ FSR, and AM/ FM. Each  
time you press [MODE], the mode display cycles  
USB or LSB, CW or CWR, FSK or FSR, FM or AM.  
To select the other mode on each pair, press [MODE]  
(1 s). For example, to select “LSB” while “USB” is  
visible, press [MODE] (1 s). “USB” changes to  
“LSB”. Press [MODE] (1 s) again to go back to  
“LSB” from “USB”. The following illustration  
describes how to access each mode with the [MODE]  
key.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
SELECTING A FREQUENCY  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP]  
to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control  
counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the  
frequency.  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
(1 s)  
(1 s)  
(1 s)  
(1 s)  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using  
the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far  
from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press  
the numeric keys as necessary. For details, refer to  
“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 34}.  
1 REC  
CH1  
2 REC  
CH2  
3 REC  
CH3  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
4
TX MONI 5 RF.G  
6
DELAY  
PWR  
MIC  
KEY  
PROC  
ENT  
ATT/PRE  
AF  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
7
8
9
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
SQL  
MULTI  
Access Menu No. 02 then press [ ] to select “on” to  
turn the Auto Mode selection ON. When it is ON,  
“AUTO” appears. As a default setting, if you change  
the frequency above or below 9.5 MHz, the  
transceiver automatically switches modes; LSB for  
frequencies under 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies  
equal to or over 9.5 MHz. You can further add the  
frequency table data to change the mode  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
0 OFF  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
SCAN  
MHz  
AGC  
This transceiver provides many other methods for  
quickly selecting a frequency. For further information,  
refer to “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY”  
{page 34}.  
automatically {page 61}.  
19  
4 OPERATING BASICS  
MULTI-FUNCTION METER  
TRANSMITTING  
The multi-function meter measures the parameters in  
the table below. The S-meter scale appears when  
the transceiver is in reception mode, and the PWR  
meter appears when it is in transmission mode.  
Each time you press [MTR/ CLR], it cycles between  
the ALC, SWR, and COMP meters. Peak readings  
for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR  
functions are held momentarily.  
For voice communications, press and hold Mic [PTT],  
then speak into the microphone in your normal tone  
of voice. When you finish speaking, release Mic  
[PTT] to receive.  
To transmit CW, press [VOX/ 8] to switch the Break-in  
function ON. “VOX” appears. Close the key or keyer  
paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {pages 7, 15},  
then select CW using [MODE] {page 19}.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
RIT  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
ATT/PRE  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
TF-SET  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
CH1  
TX MONI  
PWR  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
A
/
B
QMR  
M/V  
CW.T  
NR  
FIL  
PWR  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
A
/
B
CW.T  
SCAN  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, refer to  
“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 27.  
Multi-function meter  
SELECTING TRANSMISSION POWER  
It is wise to select a lower transmission power if  
communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of  
interfering with others on the band. When operating  
from battery power, selecting a lower transmission  
power allows you more operating time before  
recharging is necessary. This transceiver allows you  
to change the transmission power even while  
transmitting.  
Meter  
S
What Is Measured?  
Strength of received signals  
Transmission output power  
Automatic level control status  
PWR  
ALC  
SWR  
Antenna system standing wave ratio  
Speech compression level when using  
the Speech Processor {page 37}  
1 Press [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI].  
COMP  
The current transmission power appears.  
Note:  
The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is  
ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
CL  
XIT  
RIT  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.  
4
ATT/PRE  
The S-meter responds differently in FM mode, compared to other  
modes. This is not a malfunction.  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
2 Turn the MULTI control counterclockwise to  
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the  
power.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
The selectable range differs, depending on the  
transceiver model, the current band, and the  
mode.  
3 Press [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI] to complete the setting.  
Note: You may access Menu No. 21, and select “on” to change the  
step size from 5 W to 1 W {page 65}.  
20  
4 OPERATING BASICS  
MICROPHONE GAIN  
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB  
or AM mode is selected without using the speech  
processor {pages 27, 28}.  
1 Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G].  
The current microphone gain level appears.  
The range is from 0 to 100 with a default of 50.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
2 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
The LED on the panel lights red.  
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI control so that the ALC meter reflects  
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.  
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI control so that the power meter slightly  
reflects your voice level.  
FM: Access Menu No. 44 and select “1” (Normal),  
“2” (Medium), or “3” (High) for the microphone  
gain if necessary {page 27}.  
CL  
HF/50MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER TS-480  
XIT  
RIT  
ATT/PRE  
1
4
7
REC  
2
5
8
0
REC  
CH2  
RF.G  
MIC  
3
6
9
REC  
CH3  
DELAY  
KEY  
TF-SET  
CH1  
TX MONI  
DNL  
BC  
MODE  
F.LOCK  
MENU  
NAR  
IF  
SHIFT  
AF  
SQL  
MULTI  
NR  
FIL  
QMR  
M/V  
PWR  
A
/
B
CW.T  
NB/T  
CLR  
MTR  
VOX  
OFF  
AGC  
PROC  
ENT  
STEP  
FINE  
SG.SEL  
MHz  
SCAN  
4 Release Mic [PTT] to return to receive.  
The LED lights green or turns off, depending  
on the SQL control setting.  
Note: When using the MC-90 microphone with the MJ-88 in FM  
mode, select “3” (High) for the microphone gain. The microphone  
sensitivity is low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient  
modulation. For other microphones, select either “1” (Normal) or “2”  
(Medium).  
21  
MENU SETUP  
WHAT IS A MENU?  
QUICK MENU  
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or  
configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather  
than through the physical controls of the transceiver.  
Once familiar with the Menu system, you will  
appreciate the versatility it offers. You can customize  
the various timings, settings, and programming  
functions on this transceiver to meet your needs  
without using many controls and switches.  
Because the number of functions this transceiver  
provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items in  
each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos.  
to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to  
create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You  
can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently  
use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the  
Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.  
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU  
MENU A/ MENU B  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
This transceiver has 2 menus: Menu A and Menu B.  
These menus contain identical functions and can be  
configured independently. The transceiver, therefore,  
allows you to switch between 2 different  
environments quickly and easily. For example, you  
can configure Menu A for DXing and contesting while  
Menu B is for relaxed local ragchewing. By switching  
from Menu A to Menu B, you can instantly change the  
Menu configuration and key assignment to suit your  
current operating style. Or, 2 operators may share a  
single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to each  
operator. Both operators can always enjoy their own  
configuration.  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select the desired Menu  
No.  
3 Press [QMI/ M.IN].  
An inverted star, “ ” appears, indicating that  
the Menu item has been added to the Quick  
Menu.  
To remove the item from the Quick Menu,  
press [QMI/ M.IN] again. “ ” disappears.  
MENU ACCESS  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to exit Menu mode.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
USING THE QUICK MENU  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
2 Press [MHz].  
The Menu No. and setting appear on the  
display, and the explanation of the menu  
appears on the sub-display.  
MHzappears.  
2 Press [A/B / M/V] to select Menu A or Menu B.  
3 Turn the MULTI control to select the desired Quick  
Aor Bappears, indicating which Menu is  
selected.  
Menu No.  
4 Press [ ]/ [ ], or Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to change the  
3 Turn the MULTI control to select the desired Menu  
current setting for the selected Menu No.  
No.  
When the Menu is registered to the Quick  
Menu list, “ ” appears.  
Each time you change the Menu No.,  
a different scrolling message appears on the  
sub-display, describing the Menu No.  
5 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to exit Quick Menu mode.  
4 Press [ ]/ [ ], or Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to select a  
Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning the  
MULTI control in step 2 causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse code.  
parameter.  
5 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to exit Menu mode.  
22  
5 MENU SETUP  
MENU CONFIGURATION  
Menu  
Ref.  
Default  
Group  
No.  
Function  
Selections  
Page  
Display brightness  
OFF, 1: minimum, 4: maximum  
00  
oFF/ 1 to 4  
3
63  
Operator  
Interface  
01 Key illumination  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
on  
63  
61  
35  
34  
02 Auto Mode operation  
oFF  
500  
oFF  
03 Tuning control adjustment rate  
04 Tuning with Tuning control in FM mode  
250/ 500/ 1000  
oFF/ on  
Tuning  
Control  
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using  
the MULTI control  
05  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
on  
34  
34  
See  
Reference  
Page  
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI control  
in AM mode on the AM broadcast band  
06  
Memory  
Channel  
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel  
frequencies  
07  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
on  
52  
57  
57  
57  
58  
08 Program scan partially slowed  
Slow down frequency range for the Program  
scan  
100/ 200/ 300/ 400/  
500 Hz  
09  
300  
oFF  
to  
Scan  
Operation  
10 Program scan hold  
oFF/ on  
to (Time-Operated)  
co (Carrier-Operated)  
/
11 Scan resume method  
Beep output level  
12  
oFF/ 1 to 9  
4
5
62  
29  
69  
71  
71  
45  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
TX sidetone volume  
13  
oFF/ 1 to 9  
oFF/ 1 to 9  
oFF/ 1 to 7  
0 to 4  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
Monitor  
Sound  
VGS-1 message playback volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
14  
4
VGS-1 announcement volume  
15  
4
OFF, 1: minimum, 7: maximum  
VGS-1 announcement speed  
0: slow, 4: fast  
16  
1
IF Filter  
17 Use CW IF filter for SSB reception  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
DSP RX equalizer  
oFF: Flat  
Hb1: High boost 1  
Hb2: High boost 2  
DSP  
Equalizer  
FP:  
bb1  
bb2:  
c:  
Formant pass  
18  
oFF  
64  
oFF/ Hb1/ Hb2/ FP/  
bb1/ bb2/ c/ U  
Bass boost 1  
Bass boost 2  
Conventional  
U:  
Flat (Reserved for ARCP software)  
23  
5 MENU SETUP  
Menu  
No.  
Ref.  
Page  
Group  
Function  
Selections  
Default  
DSP TX equalizer  
oFF:  
Hb1:  
Hb2:  
FP:  
bb1:  
bb2:  
c:  
Flat  
High boost 1  
Hight boost 2  
DSP  
Equalizer  
oFF/ Hb1/ Hb2/ FP/  
bb1/ bb2/ c/ U  
19  
oFF  
38  
Formant pass  
Bass boost 1  
Bass boost 2  
Conventional  
U:  
Flat (Reserved for ARCP software)  
TX Filter  
20 DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM  
21 Fine transmission power tuning  
2.0/ 2.4 kHz  
oFF/ on  
2.4  
38  
65  
TX Power  
oFF  
oFF/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30  
minutes  
TOT  
22 Time-out timer  
oFF  
65  
23 Transverter frequency display  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
on  
65  
65  
60  
60  
61  
63  
63  
69  
Transverter  
24 Output power adjustment for Transverter  
25 TX hold when AT completes the tuning  
26 In-line AT while receiving  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
oFF  
At1  
Antenna  
Tuner  
oFF/ on  
27 Control method for the external AT  
28 Linear amplifier control delay for HF band  
29 Linear amplifier control delay for 50 MHz band  
30 Constant recording  
At1/ At2  
oFF/ 1/ 2/ 3  
oFF/ 1/ 2/ 3  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
Linear  
Amplifier  
41,  
69  
31 Repeat the playback  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
10  
Message  
Playback  
0 to 60 seconds  
(in steps of 1 second)  
41,  
69  
32 Interval time for repeating the playback  
33 Keying priority over playback  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
800  
41  
29  
400 to 1000 Hz  
(in steps of 50 Hz)  
34 CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency  
AUto/ 2.5 to 4.0  
(in steps of 0.1 )  
35 CW keying dot, dash weight ratio  
AUto  
39  
CW  
36 Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio  
37 Bug key function  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
170  
39  
40  
41  
41  
41  
42  
38 Swap dot and dash paddle position  
39 Auto CW TX in SSB mode  
40 Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW  
41 FSK shift  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
170/ 200/ 425/ 850 Hz  
oFF (Normal)/  
on (Reverse)  
42,  
77  
42 FSK keying polarity  
43 FSK tone frequency  
44 Mic gain for FM  
oFF  
2125  
1
FSK  
FM  
42,  
77  
1275/ 2125 Hz  
1 (Normal)/  
2 (Medium)/ 3 (High)  
27  
24  
5 MENU SETUP  
Menu  
No.  
Ref.  
Default  
Group  
Function  
Selections  
oFF/ on  
0 to 9  
Page  
45 Filter bandwidth for Data communications  
oFF  
4
48  
AF input level for Data communications  
(0: minimum ~ 9: maximum)  
77,  
78  
46  
Data Comm.  
AF output level for Data communications  
(0: minimum ~ 9: maximum)  
77,  
78  
47  
0 to 9  
4
61  
48 Remote Control panel PF key  
49 Microphone PF1 key  
50 Microphone PF2 key  
51 Microphone PF3 key  
52 Microphone PF4 key  
00 to 93 and 99  
00 to 93 and 99  
00 to 93 and 99  
00 to 93 and 99  
00 to 93 and 99  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
(VOICE1)  
75  
(A/B)  
74  
PF keys  
(SPLIT)  
76  
(M/V)  
63  
(RX MONI)  
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave  
operation  
53  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
66  
Quick Data  
Transfer  
Permit to write the transferred Split frequencies  
to the target VFOs  
54  
oFF/ on  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
oFF  
66  
38  
TX Inhibit  
COM port  
55 TX inhibit  
4800/ 9600/ 19200/  
38400/ 57600/  
115200 bps  
56 COM port communication speed  
9600  
67  
Crossband  
Repeater  
71,  
79  
57 DTS polarity  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
Busy Lockout  
58 Busy lockout (TX)  
oFF/ on  
38  
oFF/ 60/ 120/ 180  
minutes  
APO  
59 APO (Auto Power Off) function  
60  
Transmit with the audio input on the DATA  
terminal  
VOX Source  
60  
oFF/ on  
oFF  
36  
25  
5 MENU SETUP  
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST  
Function  
Menu  
No.  
Menu  
No.  
Function  
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI  
control in AM mode on the AM broadcast  
band  
AF input level for Data communications  
AF output level for Data communications  
APO (Auto Power Off) function  
Auto CW TX in SSB mode  
Auto Mode operation  
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio  
Repeat the playback  
Round off VFO frequencies changed by using  
the MULTI control  
Scan resume method  
Slow down frequency range for the Program  
scan  
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave  
operation  
Swap dot and dash paddle position  
Time-out timer  
Transmits with the audio input on the DATA  
terminal  
Transverter frequency display  
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel  
frequencies  
Tuning control adjustment rate  
Tuning with Tuning control in FM mode  
TX hold when AT completes the tuning  
TX inhibit  
36  
06  
31  
05  
11  
09  
46  
47  
59  
39  
02  
12  
37  
58  
56  
30  
27  
35  
34  
00  
18  
19  
20  
57  
45  
21  
53  
Beep output level  
38  
22  
Bug key function  
Busy lockout (TX)  
COM port communication speed  
Constant recording  
60  
23  
07  
Control method for the external AT  
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio  
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency  
Display brightness  
03  
04  
25  
55  
13  
17  
16  
15  
14  
DSP RX equalizer  
DSP TX equalizer  
DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM  
DTS polarity  
TX sidetone volume  
Use CW IF filter for SSB reception  
VGS-1 announcement speed  
VGS-1 announcement volume  
VGS-1 message playback volume  
Filter bandwidth for Data communications  
Fine transmission power tuning  
Frequency correction for changing SSB to  
CW  
40  
Remote Control panel PF key  
FSK keying polarity  
48  
42  
41  
43  
26  
32  
01  
33  
28  
FSK shift  
FSK tone frequency  
In-line AT while receiving  
Interval time for repeating the playback  
Key illumination  
Keying priority over playback  
Linear amplifier control delay for HF band  
Linear amplifier control delay for 50 MHz band 29  
Mic gain for FM  
44  
49  
50  
51  
52  
24  
Microphone PF1 key  
Microphone PF2 key  
Microphone PF3 key  
Microphone PF4 key  
Output power adjustment for Transverter  
Permit to write the transferred Split  
frequencies to the target VFOs  
54  
Program scan hold  
10  
08  
Program scan partially slowed  
26  
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
SSB TRANSMISSION  
FM TRANSMISSION  
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF  
Amateur radio bands. Compared with other voice  
modes, SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for  
communications. SSB also allows long distance  
communications with minimum transmission power.  
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or  
UHF frequencies. As for HF and the 6 m band,  
29 MHz and 51-54 MHz bands are commonly used  
for FM operation. You can also utilize 10 m/ 6 m band  
repeaters to reach your friends when they are outside  
or skipped over from your coverage. Although FM  
requires a wider bandwidth when compared to SSB  
or AM mode, it has the finest audio quality among  
these modes. When combined with the full-quieting  
aspect of FM signals, which suppress background  
noise on the frequency, FM can be the best method  
for maintaining casual communications with your  
local friends.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
2 Press [MODE] until “USB” or “LSB” appears on  
the operating mode display.  
If the desired sideband (“USB” or “LSB”) does  
not appear, select the other sideband first.  
Then, press [MODE] (1 s). The mode indicator  
changes to your desired sideband.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
“USB” represents the upper sideband and  
“LSB” represents the lower sideband.  
Normally, USB is used for the communications  
for 10 MHz and above. While LSB is used for  
the frequencies below 10 MHz.  
2 Press [MODE] until “FM” appears.  
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM”, then  
press [MODE] (1 s). The mode indicator  
changes to “FM”.  
3 Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to adjust the Microphone  
3 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
gain.  
The LED lights red.  
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
Refer to “VOX” for information on automatic  
TX/ RX switching {page 36}.  
4 Speak into the microphone in your normal tone  
and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
The LED above the [MODE] key lights red.  
You can switch the Microphone gain for FM  
between 1 (Normal), 2 (Medium), and 3 (High)  
by using Menu No. 44. 1 (Normal) is usually  
appropriate; however, select 3 (High) if other  
stations report that your modulation is weak.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 36} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
5 Speak into the microphone and turn the  
MULTI control so that the ALC meter reflects your  
voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.  
5 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
The LED lights green or turns off, depending  
on the SQL control position.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 34, for additional information on useful  
operation functions.  
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 37}  
for details.  
Note: Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no effect in  
FM mode. In FM mode, you must select 1 (Normal), 2 (Medium), or  
3 (High) in Menu No. 44.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
The LED lights green or turns off, depending  
on the SQL control position.  
7 Press [MTR/ CLR] or [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to exit the  
Microphone gain adjustment.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 34, for information on additional useful  
operation functions.  
27  
6 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
AM TRANSMISSION  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM  
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its  
own advantages. Although long distance DX  
contacts may be less common while using AM, the  
superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation  
is one reason why some hams prefer this mode.  
Select wide band or narrow band TX deviation  
depending on whether the other station is using wide  
band or narrow band filter for FM mode. While “NAR”  
appears, the TS-480 transceiver transmits signals in  
narrow band FM but the reception IF filter bandwidth  
remains unchanged (Wide). The deviation selection  
is crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient  
intelligibility that the other station will encounter.  
When looking for others operating on AM, check the  
following frequencies first:  
3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz, 21390 kHz, and  
29000 ~ 29200 kHz  
1 Press [MODE] until “FM” appears.  
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM” first, then  
press [MODE] (1 s). The mode indicator  
changes to “FM”.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
2 Press [FIL/ NAR] (1 s) to toggle the selection  
between wide and narrow TX deviation.  
2 Press [MODE] until “AM” appears.  
“NAR” appears when the narrow TX deviation  
is selected.  
If “AM” does not appear, select “FM” first, then  
press [MODE] (1 s). The mode indicator  
changes to “AM”.  
3 Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to enter the Microphone gain  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM  
adjutment mode.  
When receiving AM, you can further decrease the  
bandwidth to eliminate interference. However, the  
transmission deviation of AM is not affected by this  
selection.  
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
The LED lights red.  
1 Press [MODE] until “AM” appears.  
Refer to VOX function for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching {page 36}.  
If “AM” does not appear, select “FM” first, then  
press [MODE] (1 s). The mode indicator  
changes to “AM”.  
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the  
MULTI control so that the power meter slightly  
reflects your voice level.  
2 Press [FIL/ NAR] (1 s) to toggle the selection  
between Normal and Narrow.  
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
“NAR” appears when the narrow bandwidth is  
selected for the AM reception.  
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 37}  
for details.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
The LED lights green or turns off, depending  
on the SQL control position.  
7 Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to exit the Microphone gain  
adjustment mode.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 34, for information on additional useful  
operation functions.  
Note: When the TX power meter reading exceeds the value that you  
specified in TX Power setting {page 65}, decrease the microphone  
gain or adjust your tone and level of voice.  
28  
6 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
AUTO ZERO-BEAT  
CW TRANSMISSION  
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a  
CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly  
matches your transmit frequency with the station you  
are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your  
chances of being heard by the other station.  
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable  
when communicating under worst conditions. It may  
be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being  
equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,  
however, do not have the long history of service nor  
the simplicity that CW provides.  
1 Tune to the CW signal using the Tuning control.  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
supports a variety of functions. For details on using  
these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”  
{page 39}.  
2 Press [BC/ CW.T] (1 s) to start Auto Zero-beat  
while CW is selected for the operating mode.  
“CW TUNE” appears.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select the operating frequency.  
2 Press [MODE] until “CW” or “CWR” appears.  
Your reception frequency automatically  
changes so that the pitch (tone) of the received  
signal exactly matches the TX sidetone/ RX  
pitch frequency that you have selected. Refer  
to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY”  
{below}.  
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto  
Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”  
{below}.  
When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”  
disappears.  
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous  
frequency is restored.  
3 Press [VOX/ 8] to activate the CW break-in  
function.  
3 To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [CLR/ MTR] or  
“VOX” appears.  
press [BC/ CW.T] again.  
Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” for further information  
on automatic TX/ RX switching {page 39}.  
Note:  
You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or  
wider for the DSP filter bandwidth {page 46}.  
4 Begin sending the message.  
When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within ±50 Hz  
in most cases.  
As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone  
that lets you monitor your own transmission.  
Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is  
too slow or some interference is present.  
The LED lights red as you send the message.  
When the RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change to  
make the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.  
5 Stop sending the message to return to Reception  
mode.  
The LED lights green or turns off, depending  
on the SQL control setting.  
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY  
As you send CW, you will hear tones from the  
transceiver speaker. These are called TX  
(transmission) sidetones. Listening to these tones,  
you can monitor what you are transmitting. You may  
also use the tones to ensure that your key contacts  
are closing, the keyer is functioning, or to practice  
sending without actually putting a signal on the air.  
RX (reception) pitch refers to the frequency of CW  
that you hear after tuning in a CW station.  
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and  
RX pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu No.  
34 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for  
you. The selectable range is from 400 Hz to 1000 Hz  
in steps of 50 Hz (default is 800 Hz).  
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access  
Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and  
OFF (default is 5).  
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of  
the TX sidetone.  
29  
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION  
TF-SET (TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY SET)  
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your  
transmission frequency and reception frequency.  
Canceling this function immediately restores the  
original transmission and reception frequencies.  
By activating TF-SET, you can listen on your  
transmission frequency, and change it while listening.  
This allows you to check whether or not the newly  
selected transmission frequency is free of interference.  
Usually you can communicate with other stations  
using a single frequency for receiving and  
transmitting. In this case, you select only one  
frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there  
are cases where you must select one frequency for  
receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.  
This requires the use of 2 VFOs. This is referred to  
as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case  
which requires this type of operation is when you use  
an FM repeater {page 31}. Another typical case is  
when you call a rare DX station.  
1 Configure split-frequency operation as explained  
in the previous section.  
2 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] (1 s) to lock the Tuning  
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that  
operator may immediately get many simultaneous  
responses. Often, such a station is lost under the  
noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you  
find that you are suddenly being called by many  
operators, it is your responsibility to control the  
situation. You may announce that you will be “listening  
up 5 (kHz, from your present transmission frequency)”,  
or “listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.  
control.  
“ ” appears.  
3 Press and hold either [ ] or [ ] while the “ ”  
icon is visible. While holding down [ ] or [ ],  
turn the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
to change the transmission frequency.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B to  
reception frequency.  
tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
2 Select an operating frequency.  
The frequency selected at this point will be  
used for transmission.  
The transceiver receives on the frequency as  
you change, but the frequency shown on the  
sub-display (the original reception frequency)  
stays unchanged.  
To copy the selected VFO frequency to the  
other VFO, press [A=B/ SPLIT].  
3 Press [A/B / M/V] to select the other VFO.  
4 Release [ ] or [ ].  
You are now receiving again on your original  
reception frequency.  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
The frequency selected on this VFO will be  
used for reception.  
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often  
depends on making a well-timed call on a clear  
frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively  
clear transmission frequency and to transmit at the  
exact instant when the DX station is listening but the  
majority of the groups aren’t transmitting. Switch  
your reception and transmission frequencies by using  
the TF-SET function and listen to your transmission  
frequency. You will soon learn the rhythm of the DX  
station and the pileup. The more proficient you  
become at using this function, the more DX stations  
you will contact.  
5 Press [A=B/ SPLIT] (1 s).  
” appears.  
Each time you press [A/B / M/V], the reception  
and the transmission frequency are swapped.  
6 To quit split-frequency operation, press  
Note:  
[A=B/ SPLIT] (1 s) again.  
TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.  
” disappears.  
An RIT offset frequency is not added; however, an XIT offset  
frequency is added to the transmission frequency.  
30  
7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
FM REPEATER OPERATION  
tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
Most Amateur radio voice repeaters use a separate  
reception and transmission frequency. The  
transmission frequency may be higher or lower than  
the reception frequency. In addition, some repeaters  
may require the transceiver to transmit a subtone  
before the repeater can be used.  
2 Turn the Tuning control or MULTI control to select  
the reception frequency.  
3 Press [MODE] to select FM mode {page 19}.  
4 Press [A=B/ SPLIT] to duplicate the frequencies  
Compared to simplex communication, you can  
usually transmit over much greater distances by  
using a repeater. Repeaters are typically located on  
a mountain top or other elevated location. Often they  
operate at higher ERP (Effective Radiated Power)  
than a typical station. This combination of elevation  
and high ERP allows communications over  
considerable distances.  
and other data to the other VFO.  
5 Turn the Tuning control or MULTI control to select  
the transmission frequency.  
The frequency selected on this VFO will be  
used for transmission.  
6 Press [NB/T/ 7] to turn the Tone function ON if the  
repeater requires a subtone.  
HF/ 6 m band repeaters operate usually in the  
29 MHz FM sub-band and 51-54 MHz band. This  
special service combines the advantages of FM  
operation, good fidelity with noise and interference  
immunity, with the excitement of HF DX (long  
distance) communications. Even on a quiet day,  
10 m FM provides reliable around-town  
“T” appears.  
Refer to “Selecting a Tone Frequency” for  
more details on the subtone {page 32}.  
communications with the potential for sudden DX  
from across the country or around the world.  
To quit the Subtone function, press [NB/T/ 7]  
Note:  
twice.  
When programming 2 separate frequencies using 2 VFOs, be  
sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.  
7 Press [A=B/ SPLIT] (1 s).  
” appears.  
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by  
speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to  
“talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
8 Press [A/B / M/V] to go back to the original  
reception frequency.  
29.520 MHz  
88.5 Hz  
29.620 MHz  
9 Press Mic [PTT] to transmit.  
29.620 MHz  
29.520 MHz  
88.5 Hz  
The VFO changes to the other VFO to transmit.  
Each time you press [A/B / M/V], the reception  
and the transmission frequency are swapped.  
10 Press [A=B/ SPLIT] (1 s) to quit split-frequency  
operation.  
” disappears.  
The data that you select in steps 1 to 8 can be stored  
in memory. Refer to “Split-Frequency Channels”  
{page 51}.  
Note:  
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by  
speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal  
to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
To check the tone frequency stored in a memory channel,  
recall the desired memory channel, and press [NB/T/ 7] (1 s).  
31  
7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
TRANSMITTING A TONE  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
In general, FM repeaters require the transceiver to  
transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other  
00 67.0 11 97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
01 69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
02 71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
03 74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
04 77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
05 79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
06 82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
07 85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
08 88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
09 91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8 42 1750  
10 94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5  
repeaters on the same frequency from locking each  
other up. The required tone frequency differs among  
repeaters. Repeaters also differ in their requirements  
for either continuous or burst tones. For the  
appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters,  
consult your local repeater reference.  
After completing the tone settings, pressing and  
holding Mic [PTT] causes the transceiver to transmit  
the selected tone. If you have selected a 1750 Hz  
tone, the transceiver sends a 500 ms tone burst each  
time transmission starts.  
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need not  
reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 50}.  
Activating the Tone Function  
Note:  
1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on  
You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS  
frequency.  
the VFO(s) {page 19}.  
When 1750 Hz is selected, the transceiver sends a 500 ms  
tone burst each time transmission starts. You cannot  
transmit 1750 Hz tone manually.  
When using 2 VFOs, you must select FM  
mode on both VFOs.  
2 Press [NB/T/ 7].  
“T” appears.  
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN  
This function scans through all tone frequencies to  
identify the incoming tone frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you do not  
know the tone frequency that the repeater uses.  
Note: You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS  
function.  
1 While the Tone function is ON (“T” is visible),  
press [NB/T/ 7] (1 s).  
The current tone frequency appears.  
Selecting a Tone Frequency  
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the Tone  
1 While “T” appears (Tone function is ON), press  
frequency ID scan.  
[NB/T/ 7] (1 s).  
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “T”  
blinks and every tone frequency is scanned.  
When the tone frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
The current tone frequency appears.  
The default is 88.5 Hz.  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select the desired  
tone frequency.  
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while  
The available tone frequencies are listed in  
the following table.  
the tone frequency ID scan is active.  
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume  
scanning.  
3 Press [MTR/ CLR] to complete the setting.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.  
32  
7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
FM CTCSS OPERATION  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from  
specific persons. When using FM mode, the  
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)  
allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from  
other persons who are using the same frequency.  
A CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from  
among the 42 tone frequencies. Select the same  
CTCSS tone as the other stations in your group. You  
will not hear calls from stations other than those using  
the same CTCSS tone.  
00 67.0 11 97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
01 69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
02 71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
03 74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
04 77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
05 79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
06 82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
07 85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
08 88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
09 91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8  
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private. It  
only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
10 94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5  
2 Select the 29 MHz band or the 51-54 MHz band  
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is  
received. To answer the call, press and hold Mic  
[PTT], then speak into the microphone.  
using [ ] or [ ].  
3 Select the desired frequency with the Tuning  
control or MULTI control.  
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed  
the appropriate CTCSS frequency.  
4 Press [MODE] to select FM mode {page 19}.  
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.  
6 Press [NB/T/ 7] until “CT” appears.  
Note:  
When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on both  
VFOs to use CTCSS.  
You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone  
frequency.  
You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone function.  
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN  
7 While “CT” is visible, press [NB/T/ 7] (1 s).  
The current CTCSS frequency appears.  
The default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.  
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to  
identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you cannot  
recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in  
your group are using.  
1 While the CTCSS function is ON, press [NB/T/ 7]  
(1 s).  
8 Turn the MULTI control to select the appropriate  
The current CTCSS frequency appears.  
CTCSS frequency.  
The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in  
the following table.  
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the CTCSS  
frequency ID scan.  
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “CT”  
blinks and every CTCSS frequency is scanned.  
When the CTCSS frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
9 Press [MTR/ CLR] to complete the setting.  
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume  
scanning.  
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while  
the CTCSS frequency ID scan is active.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.  
33  
COMMUNICATING AIDS  
RECEPTION  
2 Turn the MULTI control.  
Clockwise increases the frequency and  
counter-clockwise decreases the frequency.  
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY  
3 Press [MHz] again to exit.  
“MHz” disappears.  
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing  
Mic [UP]/ [DWN], there are several other ways to  
select your frequency. This section describes  
additional methods of frequency selection that may  
save you time and effort.  
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of  
100 kHz or 500 kHz rather than 1 MHz, press  
[MHz] (1 s), then turn the MULTI control to select  
100 kHz, 500 kHz, or 1 MHz.  
Direct Frequency Entry  
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is assigned for the [MHz] key,  
“MHz” appears on the display.  
When the desired frequency is far removed from  
the current frequency, directly entering a  
frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the  
fastest method.  
Quick QSY  
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the  
MULTI control. Turning this control changes the  
operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/  
CW/ AM/ FSK and 10 kHz for FM.  
1 Press [ENT].  
“ - - . - - - . - - ” appears.  
If you want to change the default frequency  
step size, press [FINE/ STEP] (1 s). Turn the  
MULTI control to select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10  
kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30  
kHz, 50 kHz or 100 kHz for FM/ AM, and 500  
Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the  
other modes. The default frequency step size  
is 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM and 10 kHz for  
FM.  
2 Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter  
your desired frequency.  
Pressing [ENT] at any time fills the  
remaining digits (the digits you did not  
enter) with 0 and completes the entry.  
To select 1.85 MHz for example, press  
[ENT], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to  
complete the input (6 key strokes).  
When changing the operating frequency by  
using the MULTI control, frequencies are  
rounded such that new frequencies are  
multiples of the frequency step size. To disable  
this function, access Menu No. 05 and select  
“oFF” (default is ON).  
Pressing [MTR/ CLR] before pressing  
[ENT] cancels the entry and restores the  
current VFO frequency.  
Within the AM broadcast band, the step size  
automatically defaults to the frequency step  
value in Menu No. 06. This frequency step  
size can be switched between 9 kHz (all E-  
types: “on”) and 5 kHz (K-type: “oFF”) via Menu  
No. 06.  
Note:  
You can enter a frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz to  
59.999.99 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the  
available frequency range.  
Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the  
selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound.  
The entered frequency is rejected.  
When the entered frequency does not meet the current  
VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest  
available frequency is automatically selected after the  
entered frequency is changed.  
Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI  
control is stored independently for the HF and 50 MHz bands.  
You can also set a different frequency step size for SSB/ CW/  
FSK, AM and FM modes.  
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the  
digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit, and  
frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not  
displayed.  
Configuring the Tuning Control as MULTI control  
(FM)  
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be  
switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not  
cleared.  
In FM mode, you can configure the Tuning control  
to change the frequency as same as the MULTI  
control. Access Menu No. 04 and select “on”  
(default is OFF). As you turn the Tuning control,  
the frequency changes as same as turning the  
MULTI control.  
Using the MHz key  
Pressing [ ]/ [ ] on the Remote Control panel  
changes Amateur bands. You can also use the  
MULTI control to change the operating frequency  
in steps of 1 MHz.  
1 Press [MHz].  
“MHz” appears.  
34  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
step size becomes 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with  
all modulation modes and while using VFO or  
Memory Recall mode.  
Fine Tuning  
The default frequency step size when turning the  
Tuning control to change the frequency is 10 Hz  
for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM  
and AM modes. However, you can change the  
frequency step size to 1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK  
modes, and 10 Hz for FM and AM modes.  
1 Press [RIT].  
“RIT” and the RIT offset appear.  
1 Press [FINE/ STEP].  
“FINE” appears.  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the RIT offset to 0.  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your reception  
frequency.  
4 To turn RIT OFF, press [RIT].  
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact  
The reception frequency is returned to the  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
frequency.  
3 To quit the function, press [FINE/ STEP] again.  
Note: When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with the RIT  
function ON, the RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/ from  
the VFO frequency. The calculated data is then stored in the Memory  
channel.  
“FINE” disappears.  
Tuning control adjustment rate  
The default Tuning control adjustment rate is 500.  
This represents the number of pulses the Tuning  
control generates in a complete revolution. Each  
pulse changes the tuning frequency based on the  
current frequency step size (the frequency step  
size for the Tuning control is 10 Hz for SSB/ CW/  
FSK mode and 100 Hz for AM/ FM mode). For  
example, in SSB mode the frequency step size is  
10 Hz, so the frequency would change by  
5,000 Hz in a complete revolution of the Tuning  
control. The adjustment rate of the Tuning control  
can be lowered to 250 pulses per revolution or  
increased to 1000 pulses per revolution.  
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)  
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the  
time constant for the Automatic Gain Control circuit.  
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver  
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large  
input changes. A fast time constant causes the  
receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to  
changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is  
particularly useful in the following situations:  
Tuning rapidly  
Receiving weak signals  
Receiving high-speed CW  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select Menu No. 03.  
For your convenience, the following default AGC time  
constant has already been programmed.  
3 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “250”, “500” (default),  
or “1000”.  
SSB: Slow (“AGC”)  
CW: Fast (“AGC - F”)  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting  
FSK: Fast (“AGC - F”) AM: Slow (“AGC”)  
To change the default time constant:  
1 Press [AGC/ 0/ OFF].  
and exit Menu mode.  
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)  
This function allows you to copy the frequency and  
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive  
VFO.  
The AGC time constant icon appears on the  
display (“AGC”: Slow, “AGC - F”: Fast).  
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or  
VFO B.  
2 Press [A=B/ SPLIT].  
The frequency and mode selected in step 1  
are duplicated to the inactive VFO.  
Each time you press [AGC/ 0/ OFF], the AGC  
time constant alternates fast and slow.  
3 Press [A/B / M/V] to confirm that the frequency  
was copied to other VFO.  
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)  
2 If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press  
RIT provides the ability to change your reception  
frequency by ±9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without  
changing your transmission frequency. If the Fine  
Tuning ([FINE/ STEP]) function is ON, the frequency  
[AGC/ 0/ OFF] (1 s).  
“AGC OFF” appears on the display.  
Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant in FM mode.  
35  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
Delay Time  
TRANSMISSION  
If the transceiver returns to reception mode too  
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word  
may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an  
appropriate delay time that allows all of your  
words to be transmitted without an overly long  
delay after you stop speaking.  
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)  
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching  
to the transmission mode each time you want to  
transmit. The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode when the VOX circuitry senses  
that you have begun speaking into the microphone.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing  
between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop  
back to reception mode briefly. You will then hear if  
anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short  
period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.  
Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as  
well as respect your more articulate conversation.  
2 Press [VOX/ 8] to switch the VOX function ON.  
“VOX” appears.  
3 Press [KEY/ DELAY] (1 s).  
The current setting appears on the sub-  
display. The default is 50 (1500 ms).  
VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for  
CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.  
Press [VOX/ 8] to toggle between VOX ON and OFF.  
“VOX” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using your  
normal tone of voice, turn the MULTI control  
such that the transceiver switches to reception  
mode after you have stopped talking.  
The selectable range is from 5 to 100  
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.  
Microphone Input Level  
5 Press [MTR/ CLR] to store the parameter and  
exit the setting mode.  
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to  
properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This  
level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to  
detect the presence or absence of your voice.  
In CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.  
Anti-VOX adjustment  
The TS-480 transceiver has a DSP IC to improve  
and customize incoming/ outgoing audio signals.  
When VOX function is turned ON, the DSP IC  
adjusts the Anti-VOX level automatically,  
comparing the reception sound level and  
microphone input level. So, you never have to  
worry about adjusting the anti-VOX level.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [VOX/ 8] to switch the VOX function ON.  
“VOX” appears.  
VOX Source  
Although microphone is normally used to perform  
the VOX transmission, you can also utilize AF  
input of the DATA connector (pin 1) on the TX/ RX  
unit {page 78}. When the transceiver detects the  
audio signal on the pin 1 of DATA connector, the  
transceiver automatically transmits.  
3 Press [VOX/ 8] (1 s).  
The current VOX gain level appears on the  
sub-display.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [VOX/ 8] to switch the VOX function ON.  
“VOX” appears.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using your  
normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default  
is 4) using the MULTI control until the  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn MULTI  
control to select Menu No. 60.  
transceiver reliably switches to transmission  
mode each time you speak.  
4 Press [ ] to switch the VOX with DATA input  
function ON.  
The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.  
5 Turn MULTI control to select Menu No. 46.  
The setting should not allow background  
noise to switch the transceiver to transmit  
mode.  
6 While sending AF signal to pin 1 of DATA  
connector, adjust the value (default is 4) using  
[
]/ [ ] until the transceiver reliably switches  
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is  
switched OFF or while you are transmitting.  
to transmit mode each time you send AF signal  
to pin 1 of DATA connector.  
Note: VOX function does not work even if you speak into the  
microphone. However, you can transmit with the Mic [PTT].  
36  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)  
SPEECH PROCESSOR  
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in  
your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or  
AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the  
average TX power, resulting in a more  
understandable signal. The amount of voice  
compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that  
using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be  
heard by distant stations.  
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your  
transmission frequency by ±9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz  
without changing your reception frequency. If the Fine  
Tuning function is ON, the frequency step size  
becomes 1 Hz.  
1 Press [XIT].  
“XIT” and the XIT offset appear.  
TX power  
Speech  
Processor  
OFF  
Time  
Time  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the XIT offset to 0.  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your transmit  
frequency.  
TX power  
Speech  
Processor  
ON  
4 To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT].  
“XIT” and offset frequency display disappear.  
The transmission frequency is returned to the  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
Note:  
2 Press [PROC/ 9] to turn the Speech Processor  
If the Fine Tuning function is ON, you can adjust the frequency  
ON.  
within ±9.99 kHz.  
The frequency shift set by the XIT control is also used by the RIT  
function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset also  
affects the RIT offset.  
“PROC” appears.  
3 Press [PROC/ 9] (1 s) to enter the Speech  
When the XIT frequency exceeds the limit of available  
transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops  
transmitting.  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
4 As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI control so that the compression meter  
indicates that the compression level is around  
10 dB while you speak.  
Using higher compression will not improve your  
signal clarity or apparent signal strength.  
Excessively compressed signals are more  
difficult to understand due to distortion and are  
less pleasant to hear than signals with less  
compression.  
5 Press [PROC/ 9] (1 s) to exit the Speech  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
6 Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to enter the Speech  
Processor output level adjustment mode.  
As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI control so that the ALC meter reflects  
according to your voice level but does not  
exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] to  
exit when you finish the adjustment mode.  
37  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
Frequency Response Curves  
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMISSION SIGNAL  
CHARACTERISTICS  
Amplitude  
The quality of your transmission signal is important,  
regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.  
However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact  
since you don’t listen to your own signal.  
Conventional (c)  
Formant pass (FP)  
High boost (Hb1, Hb2)  
The following sub-sections provide information that  
will help you tailor your transmission signal.  
Off (oFF)  
Bass boost (bb1, bb2)  
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM)  
Audio  
frequency  
(kHz)  
0.7  
2.2  
Use Menu No. 20 to select one of the following TX  
filter bandwidths: 2.0 kHz or 2.4 kHz (default).  
Display  
Bandwidth  
Passband frequency  
TRANSMIT INHIBIT  
2.0  
2.4  
2.0 kHz  
2.4 kHz  
500 ~ 2500 Hz  
300 ~ 2700 Hz  
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmission mode. No signal can be  
transmitted when this function is ON even if Mic [PTT]  
is pressed.  
TX Equalizer (SSB/ FM/ AM)  
TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
Use Menu No. 19 to change the transmission  
frequency characteristics of your signal. You can  
select from one of 6 different transmission profiles  
including the default flat response. Selecting any of  
the following items from the Menu causes “EQ T”  
to appear on the display.  
TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 55.  
The default is OFF.  
s
BUSY LOCKOUT  
Off (oFF):  
Busy Lockout prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmit mode. Transmission is not allowed  
if the current operating frequency is busy (in other  
words, the squelch is open).  
The flat frequency response for SSB, FM, and  
AM (default).  
High boost 1 (Hb1)/ High boost 2 (Hb2):  
Busy Lockout OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective  
for a bassy voice. High boost 2 does not  
reduce the low frequency as much as High  
boost 1.  
Busy Lockout ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 58.  
The default is OFF.  
Formant pass (FP):  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio  
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency  
range.  
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING  
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually  
an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with  
other stations. However, if necessary, by using the  
Tuning control you can change the operating  
frequency while transmitting. You also can change  
the XIT offset frequency while in transmission mode.  
Bass boost 1 (bb1)/ Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective  
for a voice with more high frequency  
components. Bass boost 2 emphasises more  
low frequency response.  
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside  
the transmission frequency range, the transceiver is  
automatically forced to return to the reception mode.  
If you selected transmission mode by pressing Mic  
[PTT], transmission will not resume until you select a  
frequency inside the transmission frequency range, at  
which time you must release and press Mic [PTT]  
again.  
Conventional (c):  
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz  
and higher.  
User (U):  
Reserved for the optional ARCP software.  
Off (oFF) is programmed at the factory as a  
default.  
38  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
CHANGING KEYING SPEED  
CW BREAK-IN  
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully  
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is  
important in order to send error-free CW that other  
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is  
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.  
You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed  
that is close to the speed used by the other station.  
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually  
switching between transmission and reception  
modes. Two types of Break-ins are available: Semi  
Break-in and Full Break-in.  
Semi Break-in:  
When the key contacts open, the transceiver  
automatically waits for the passage of the time period  
that you have selected. The transceiver then returns  
to reception mode.  
1 Press [MODE] until you select CW mode.  
“CW” or “CWR” appears.  
Full Break-in:  
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver  
returns to reception mode.  
2 Press [KEY/ 6/ DELAY].  
The current keying speed appears. The default  
is 20 (WPM).  
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN  
1 Press [MODE] until you select CW mode.  
“CW” or “CWR” appears.  
2 Press [VOX/ 8].  
“VOX” appears.  
3 Press [KEY/ 6/ DELAY] (1 s).  
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the TX  
(transmission) sidetone, turn the MULTI control to  
select the appropriate speed.  
The speeds range from 10 (WPM) to 60 (WPM),  
in steps of 1 (WPM). The larger the number, the  
faster the speed.  
The current setting (FBK or delay time)  
appears. The default is FBK (Full Break-in).  
4 Press [KEY/ 6/ DELAY] again to complete the  
setting.  
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the selected  
speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.  
4 Turn the MULTI control to select “FBK” (Full  
AUTO WEIGHTING  
Break-in) or a delay time for Semi Break-in.  
The electronic keyer can automatically change the  
dot/ dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash  
length to dot length. The weighting changes with  
your keying speed automatically, thus making your  
keying easier for other operators to copy (default).  
Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to  
1000 ms) in steps of 5.  
Access Menu No. 35 to select “AUto” or “2.5” ~ “4.0”  
(in steps of 0.1) fix weight ratio. The default is AUTO.  
When the fix weight ratio is selected, the dot/ dash  
weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed.  
5 Begin sending.  
The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode.  
When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected:  
The transceiver immediately switches to  
reception mode when the key opens.  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio  
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you  
increase your keying speed. However, the  
electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting  
as you increase your keying speed.  
When a delay time is selected:  
The transceiver switches to reception mode  
after the delay time that you have selected has  
passed.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 36,  
and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
6 Press [MTR/ CLR] to exit.  
Reverse  
Keying  
Note: FBK (Full Break-in) cannot be used with the TL-922/ 922A  
linear amplifier.  
Keying Speed (WPM)  
10 ~ 25  
1:2.8  
1:3.2  
26 ~ 45  
1:3.0  
1:3.0  
46 ~ 60  
1:3.2  
1:2.8  
Weight  
OFF  
ON  
ELECTRONIC KEYER  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the  
transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW  
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 7} for details regarding  
this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic  
(squeeze) operation.  
39  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
BUG KEY FUNCTION  
The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a  
semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also  
known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are  
generated in the normal manner by the electronic  
keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by  
the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for  
the appropriate length of time.  
5 To complete the message storage, press  
[MTR/ CLR] to stop.  
When the memory becomes full, recording  
automatically stops.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 37 and  
select “on”. The default is OFF.  
Note:  
If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to record  
a message, a pause is stored in the channel.  
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory  
(see below) cannot be used.  
When the optional VGS-1 is installed and the Constant  
Recording function is working, CH3 cannot be used.  
Checking CW Messages without Transmitting  
CW MESSAGE MEMORY  
1 Press [MODE] until you select CW mode.  
This transceiver has 3 memory channels for storing  
CW messages. Each memory channel can store  
approximately 50 characters (equivalent of 250 dots).  
These memory channels are ideal for storing contest  
exchanges that you want to send repeatedly. Stored  
messages can be played back to check message  
content or for transmitting.  
“CW” or “CWR” appears.  
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ 8] to switch it OFF.  
3 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC], [CH2/ 2/ REC] or  
[CH3/ 3/ REC] to select the channel to be  
played back.  
The message is played back.  
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you  
to interrupt playback and manually inject your own  
keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu  
No. 33 and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
To play back the messages stored in the  
other channels in sequence, press the  
corresponding channel keys during  
playback. Up to 3 channels can be queued  
at the same time.  
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back  
the message that you stored. To switch this function  
ON, access Menu No. 31 and select “on”. The  
default is OFF.  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages.  
Use Menu No. 32 and select the time in the range  
of 0 to 60 seconds in steps of 1 second {page 41}.  
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY/ 6/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI  
control.  
Note:  
This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is  
ON.  
To interrupt playback, press [MTR/ CLR].  
Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 33 OFF cancels  
message playback. Even if message playback does not stop  
because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback  
by pressing [MTR/ CLR].  
Transmitting CW Messages  
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-  
in/ Full Break-in or manual TX/ RX switching.  
Storing CW Messages  
1 Press [MODE] until “CW” or “CWR” appears.  
1 Press [MODE] until you select CW mode.  
2 To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press  
[VOX/ 8].  
“CW” or “CWR” appears.  
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ 8].  
“VOX” disappears {page 39}.  
“VOX” appears.  
3 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC], [CH2/ 2/ REC] or  
[CH3/ 3/ REC] to select the channel to be  
played back.  
3 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC] (1 s), [CH2/ 2/ REC]  
(1 s) or [CH3/ 3/ REC] (1 s) to select a memory  
channel to be recorded.  
The message is played back and  
transmitted automatically.  
To transmit the messages stored in the  
other channels in sequence, press the  
corresponding channel keys during  
playback. Up to 3 channels can be queued  
at the same time.  
If the Constant Recording is ON (Menu No.  
30), you cannot store a message to CH3  
{page 69}.  
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY/ 6/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI  
control.  
4 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.  
The message you send is stored in memory.  
To interrupt transmission, press [MTR/ CLR].  
40  
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE  
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time  
For the message playback repeat, access Menu  
No. 31 and select “on”. You can also change the  
interval playback time of the message. Access  
Menu No. 32 and select the time in the range of 0  
to 60 seconds in steps of 1 second.  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can  
configure the transceiver to change the operating  
mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then  
transmit in CW mode automatically when you operate  
the CW keyers.  
Note: Menu Nos. 31 and 32 settings are shared with the voice  
communication modes when the optional VGS-1 is installed.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to access Menu No. 39.  
Changing the CW Sidetone Volume  
2 Press [ ] to select “on”.  
Turning the AF control does not change the CW  
sidetone playback volume. To change the CW  
sidetone volume, access Menu No. 13 and select  
“oFF”, or “1” to “9”.  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the settings and  
exit the Menu mode.  
Note: You must switch the CW Break-in function ON to change the  
mode and transmit in CW mode {page 39}.  
Insert Keying  
MIC UP/ DWN KEY PADDLE MODE  
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing  
back a recorded CW message, the transceiver  
stops playing back the message. However, during  
contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes  
want to insert a different number or message at a  
certain point in the recorded message.  
This function allows you to send CW message  
without using an optional paddle {page 7}. Mic [UP]  
key can be used as dot paddle and Mic [DWN] key  
can be used as a dash paddle.  
To activate Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode:  
1 Turn the transceiver OFF.  
In this case, first record the CW message as usual  
{page 40}, without the number or message you  
want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 33 and  
select “on”.  
2 Press Mic [UP] or Mic [DWN]+[ ] (POWER).  
Press and hold Mic [UP] to send dots or Mic  
[DWN] to send dashes in CW mode.  
Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play  
back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses  
the playback of the recorded message, instead of  
stopping it. When you finish sending the number  
or message with the keyer, the transceiver  
resumes playback of the message.  
To exit Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode, perform step  
1 and 2 again.  
SWAP DOT AND DASH PADDLE POSITION  
This function reverses the position of the dot and  
dash paddle positions. As a default, the left paddle  
sends dots and the right paddle sends dashes. This  
function reverses these positions. When this function  
is ON, the left paddle sends dashes and the right  
paddle sends dots.  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would  
sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to  
watch and listen to CW signals. It is fine just to  
monitor those CW signals but you have experienced  
that changing the mode from SSB to CW results in  
losing the target CW signal. This is because the  
frequency on the display always shows the true  
carrier frequency for all modes. If you want the  
transceiver to shift the reception frequency to trace  
the receiving CW signal when changing the mode  
from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW, switch this function  
ON. The transceiver shifts the reception frequency  
when changing the mode from SSB to CW, so you  
can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit  
the signal in CW without adjusting the frequency.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select Menu No. 38.  
3 Press [ ] to select “on”.  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
exit Menu mode.  
The left paddle now sends dashes and the right  
paddle now sends dots. To return to the  
normal paddle positions, select “oFF” in step 3.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to access Menu No. 40.  
2 Press [ ] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the settings and  
exit the Menu mode.  
41  
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS  
RADIO TELETYPE (RTTY)  
7 Follow the instructions provided with your MCP  
and enter a command from your computer to  
transmit.  
RTTY is the data communications mode with the  
longest history. It was originally designed for use with  
mechanical teletypewriters which were often used  
before personal computers became common. Now  
you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal  
computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you  
type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you  
typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer  
screen of the recipient.  
The LED changes from green (RX) to red (TX).  
8 Begin sending data from your computer.  
Press [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI] (1 s) to monitor your  
signals. Press [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI] (1 s) again  
to quit this function.  
9 When finished transmitting, enter a command from  
your computer to return to reception mode.  
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)  
and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to  
transmit information.  
The LED changes from red (TX) to green (RX).  
The following frequencies (measured in kHz)  
commonly used for RTTY operation:  
For the cable connections, refer to “RTTY  
OPERATION” {page 77}.  
ARU Region 1  
U.S.A./ Canada  
(Europe/ Africa)  
For further information, consult reference books  
about Amateur Radio.  
1800 ~ 1840  
3605 ~ 3645 (DX: 3590)  
7080 ~ 7100 (DX: 7040)  
10140 ~ 10150  
1838 ~ 1842  
3580 ~ 3620  
1 Access Menu No. 41 and select an FSK shift.  
FSK shift is the difference in frequencies  
between a mark and a space.  
7035 ~ 7045  
10140 ~ 10150  
14080 ~ 14099.5  
18101 ~ 18109  
21080 ~ 21120  
22920 ~ 24929  
28050 ~ 28150  
The 170 Hz shift (default) is normally used on  
the Amateur bands for the RTTY.  
14070 ~ 14099.5  
18100 ~ 18110  
2 Access Menu No. 42 and select a key-down  
polarity.  
21070 ~ 21100  
Select “oFF” (default) to transmit a mark when  
keying down or “on” to transmit a space.  
24920 ~ 24930  
3 Access Menu No. 43 and select “2175” (high tone)  
28070 ~ 28150  
or “1275” (low tone) for mark.  
Note: The TS-480 transceiver utilizes the DSP IC to generate a  
variety of the required audio tones for RTTY operation (AFSK).  
High tone (default) is commonly used  
nowadays.  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
5 Press [MODE] to select FSK mode {page 19}.  
If necessary, access Menu No. 47 to configure  
the appropriate audio output level for your  
MCP. The audio output level of ANO  
(REMOTE connector/ pin 5) changes  
{page 78}. The AF control cannot be used to  
adjust the audio level for your MCP.  
6 Some stations may be operating in Reverse shift.  
In this case, press [MODE] (1 s) to reverse the  
shift (the upper sideband is used).  
“FSR” appears.  
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for  
FSK operation. Press [MODE] (1 s) again to  
return to the lower sideband. “FSK” appears.  
42  
9 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS  
AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31  
PACKET RADIO  
Besides RTTY, digital modes which have been used  
among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR, CLOVER, G-  
TOR, and PSK31. For details, consult reference  
books about the digital mode communications of  
amateur radio.  
Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from  
one computer to another, on a network. Packets can  
be transmitted on radio waves as well as on  
communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a  
computer, all you need is a terminal node controller  
(TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor  
(MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to  
convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa.  
Connecting a TNC to this transceiver allows you to  
use many packet applications.  
AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has  
brought amateur HF digital communication into the  
computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode  
by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are  
transmitted.  
A variety of packet applications developed by hams  
include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs).  
PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers  
called System Operators (SysOp). You may access  
one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download  
files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands  
of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network,  
relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the  
world.  
PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has  
combined the best features of both AMTOR and  
Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital  
communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR  
sends error-free data using a handshaking method.  
Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER  
offers the best overall performance using a  
complicated modulation technique, automatic power  
adjustment and other advanced features. It may  
allow communications to be maintained under the  
worst conditions.  
PBBS  
G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is a  
relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in  
use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the  
adverse conditions of communicating across the solar  
system with spacecraft during their missions.  
PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast,  
G3PLX, in the United Kingdom. The operating  
technique is very similar to the conventional Baudot-  
RTTY, although more sensitive fine-tuning is required,  
as a PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a  
few Hertz. A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows  
the entire ASCII character set, including the back  
space character.  
When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you  
often need to register as a new user. After you are  
successfully registered, it will then be available as  
your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be  
held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your  
home PBBS.  
Your MCP should handle some or all of the above  
modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult  
the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable  
connections, refer to “MCP AND TNC” {page 78}.  
For further information, consult reference books  
which should be available at any store that handles  
Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to  
Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search  
engines, use “Packet Radio” as key words to find  
those Web pages.  
On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying  
(AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of  
modulation uses audio tones, therefore either LSB or  
USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is  
used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR  
which is normally operated in USB.  
Note:  
AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 kHz  
and 3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places  
when searching for PacTOR, CLOVER, G-TOR, or  
PSK31 stations.  
Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP)  
serves as a communications interface in several digital modes  
such as Packet, RTTY, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch  
among the modes by sending a single command from your  
computer.  
If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider becoming  
a member. You can often learn more in an hour from  
experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research.  
Ask on the local repeaters or contact your national amateur radio  
organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local  
amateur radio clubs. You’ll be glad you did.  
The TS-480 transceiver has special DSP filters for  
these digital modes. Refer to page 48 for details.  
Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast AGC  
setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.  
43  
9 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS  
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE  
Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application  
for transmitting still images over the air, from one  
station to another. Instead of trying to describe your  
station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting  
images over the air requires a scan converter,  
besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms  
images taken with a video camera into audio signals  
that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient’s  
scan converter transforms audio signals back into  
video images so that he or she can view them on a  
TV set.  
Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams  
use a personal computer, a software application, and  
an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much  
cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set.  
In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have  
become available. You can transfer images from  
these cameras into your computer.  
For further information, consult reference books about  
Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in kHz)  
commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below:  
ARU Region 1  
U.S.A./ Canada  
(Europe/ Africa)  
3845, 3857  
7171  
3730 ~ 3740  
7035 ~ 7045  
14225 ~ 14235  
21335 ~ 21345  
28675 ~ 28685  
14230, 14233  
21340  
28680  
145500  
Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image  
transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to  
exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV.  
Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax  
systems. It scans paper and converts acquired  
image data into a series of tones representing white  
and black portions of the image. Because fax  
requires longer transmission time, you should use it  
only when band conditions are stable with strong  
signals.  
Popular fax frequencies include the following:  
7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and  
28945 kHz  
Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning  
the functionality of your computer application or  
accessory hardware that supports these modes.  
Consult the instruction manual that comes with your  
software or accessory equipment.  
Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting  
and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.  
44  
REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
IF FILTER  
IF Filter bandwidth  
DSP Filter (AF) bandwidth  
~ 300 Hz ~ 600 Hz ~ 2.0 kHz  
The IF filters are designed for selecting the exact  
range of intermediate frequencies that are sent to the  
next stage in the receive circuit. Interference  
adjacent to the desired signal can be reduced by  
selecting a narrow bandwidth filter and/ or shifting the  
center frequency of the filter.  
YF-107CN YF-107C YF-107SN  
270 Hz  
500 Hz  
1.8 kHz  
2.4 kHz (Normal)  
1.8 kHz (Normal)  
2.4 kHz  
500 Hz (NAR)  
To more effectively remove interference, combine the  
IF filtering and the DSP filtering (AF) described on  
pages 46 and 47.  
(Normal)  
270 Hz  
2.4 kHz (Normal)  
(NAR)  
1.8 kHz  
(Normal)  
500 Hz (NAR)  
CHANGING THE IF FILTER BANDWIDTH  
270 Hz  
1.8 kHz (Normal)  
(NAR)  
When adjacent frequency interference is present at  
both sides of the desired signal, narrowing IF filter  
bandwidth may be the best way to remove the  
interference. Changing the filter bandwidth will not  
effect the current reception frequency.  
270 Hz 500 Hz 2.4 kHz  
(NAR 2) (NAR) (Normal)  
FM  
In FM mode, you cannot change the reception IF filter  
bandwidth. The bandwidth is fixed at 12 kHz.  
You can install 2 optional IF filters for SSB, CW, and  
FSK modes. After installing the optional filters  
{page 81}, the transceiver automatically recognizes  
what type of optional filters are installed.  
IF SHIFT (SSB/ CW/ FSK)  
Shifting the center frequency of the filter pass band is  
an additional method of removing adjacent frequency  
interference. Shifting this center frequency does not  
change the current reception frequency.  
SSB/ AM  
When you operate the transceiver in SSB or AM  
mode, you can manually select the wide or narrow  
filter.  
To remove interference that is higher in frequency  
than the desired signal, turn the IF SHIFT control  
counterclockwise. To remove interference that is  
lower in frequency than the desired signal, turn the IF  
SHIFT control clockwise.  
Press [FIL/ NAR] (1 s) to select another IF filter.  
Each press of [FIL/ NAR] (1 s) changes “  
(Normal) / NAR”, then back to “ ” (Normal).  
If Menu No. 17 is ON (default is OFF) and 2 IF  
filters have been installed, you can select  
secondary IF filter. In this case, each press of  
[FIL/ NAR] (1 s) changes “ ” (Normal) / NAR”  
/ NAR 2”, then back to “ ” (Normal).  
IF pass band  
IF  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
IF filter bandwidth  
Mode  
Normal  
2.4 kHz  
6.0 kHz  
Narrow  
1.8 kHz1/  
SSB  
AM  
500 Hz2/ 270 Hz3  
2.4 kHz  
Desired  
signal  
Interfering  
signal  
1
2
Optional YF-107SN filter must be installed.  
Optional YF-107C filter must be installed and Menu No. 17 must  
be set to ON.  
3
Optional YF-107CN filter must be installed and Menu No. 17  
must be set to ON.  
CW/ FSK  
When you operate in CW or FSK mode, the wide filter  
or narrow filter is automatically selected according to  
the DSP filter bandwidth that you select.  
The following table describes how the optional filter is  
selected as you change the bandwidth of DSP filter.  
You cannot manually select the IF filter. To change  
the DSP filter bandwidth, refer to “CHANGING THE  
DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH” {page 46}.  
45  
10 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
DSP FILTERS  
Adjust  
Mode  
Frequency Selections (Hz)  
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)  
technology is adapted to this transceiver. Using DSP  
filtering (AF), you can control the bandwidth, cancel  
the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the noise level  
using DSP filtering technology.  
1000, 1200, 1400, 1600,  
SSB/ 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400,  
FM  
2600, 2800, 3000, 3400  
(default), 4000, 5000  
2500, 3000 (default), 4000,  
5000  
HI  
AM  
0, 50, 100 (default), 200,  
300, 400, 500, 600, 700,  
800, 900, 1000  
CHANGING THE DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH  
SSB/  
FM  
For improving interference reduction capability, this  
transceiver also provides the DSP filtering (AF) along  
with IF filters. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode, you  
can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low  
LO  
AM  
0, 100 (default), 200, 500  
Note:  
and/ or high cut-off frequency.  
For CW and FSK  
The cut-off frequencies (LO) can be adjusted independently  
for each operating mode. When you change the operating  
mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating  
mode.  
modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by  
directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the DSP  
filter bandwidth (AF) does not affect the current  
reception frequency.  
When the DSP filter for data communication (Menu No. 45) is  
ON, you cannot change the DSP filter bandwidth. Select  
“oFF” to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.  
SSB/ FM/ AM  
CW/ FSK  
1 Press [MODE] to select CW or FSK mode.  
2 Press [FIL/ NAR].  
The current DSP filter bandwidth (AF)  
1 Press [MODE] to select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [FIL/ NAR].  
The current high-cut filter frequency for the  
mode appears on the sub-display.  
3 Turn the MULTI control clockwise to raise the  
high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to  
lower the high cut-off frequency.  
appears.  
3 Turn the MULTI control clockwise to increase  
(wider) the bandwidth, or counterclockwise to  
decrease (narrower) the bandwidth.  
IF  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
Pass band (AF)  
f
f
IF  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
4 Press [FIL/ NAR] again.  
The current low-cut filter frequency appears.  
5 Turn the MULTI control clockwise to raise the  
low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to  
lower the low cut-off frequency.  
Interfering  
signal  
Desired  
signal  
Interfering  
signal  
6 To return to the normal operation, press  
Default  
(Hz)  
Mode  
Bandwidth Selections (Hz)  
[FIL/ NAR] or [MTR/ CLR].  
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400,  
500, 600, 1000, 2000  
CW  
600  
IF  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
FSK 250, 500, 1000, 1500  
1500  
f
f
4 As for CW, you can further adjust the RX pitch  
frequency. Access Menu No. 34 and turn the  
MULTI control to adjust the RX pitch frequency  
from 400 to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The  
default RX pitch frequency is 800 Hz {page 29}.  
IF  
MULTI  
SHIFT  
5 To return to the current operating mode, press  
[MTR/ CLR] or [FIL/ NAR].  
46  
10 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ FM/ AM)  
NOISE BLANKER  
Two types of Beat Cancel DSP filters are available.  
Beat Cancel 1 (BC1) is effective for removing a weak  
beat or continuous beat signals. Beat Cancel 2  
(BC2) is effective for removing intermittent beat  
signals, such as CW signals.  
Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise  
such as that generated by automobile ignitions.  
Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.  
Press [NB/T/ 7] to toggle the Noise Blanker ON and  
OFF.  
Filter pass band (AF)  
“NB” appears when the function is ON.  
Interfering  
tone  
Desired  
signal  
You can further adjust the Noise Blanker level from  
1 to 10. The default level is 6.  
Before  
After  
Press [NB/T/ 7] (1 s), then turn the MULTI control to  
Press [BC/ CW.T] to cycle through Beat Cancel 1,  
adjust the Noise Blanker level.  
Beat Cancel 2, and OFF.  
“NB LV.” and the current level appear on the sub-  
display.  
t
s
1 BC” or “BC 2” appears when the Beat Cancel  
function is ON.  
Note:  
The interfering beat signals are removed.  
Noise Blanker is available only for SSB, CW, FSK, and AM  
modes.  
NOISE REDUCTION (ALL MODES)  
Increasing the Noise Blanker level degrades the intermodulation  
characteristics of the transceiver.  
This transceiver provides 2 types of Noise Reduction  
functions (NR1 and NR2) for reducing random noise  
which interferes with the desired signal. Trying them  
both is the easiest way to judge which function works  
more effectively under the current conditions.  
Normally, select NR1 (Line Enhanced) in SSB mode  
and NR2 (SPAC) in CW mode.  
DIGITAL NOISE LIMITER (DNL)  
Digital Noise Limiter (DNL) is designed to reduce  
pulse noise such as that generated by automobile  
ignitions. Try this function when the Noise Blanker  
function cannot remove the pulse noises effectively.  
Digital Noise Limiter does not function in FM mode.  
Press [NR] to toggle between NR1, NR2, and OFF.  
Press [DNL] to toggle the DNL ON and OFF.  
t
s
1 NR” or “NR 2” appears, depending on which  
type of noise reduction filter is selected.  
“DNL” appears when the function is ON.  
Setting the NR1 Level Adjustment  
The NR1 (Line Enhanced Method) uses an  
adaptive filter to reduce the noise element from  
the received signals. When the S/N ratio is  
reasonably good in SSB, using the NR1 will  
improve the S/N further.  
You can further adjust the DNL level from 1 to 3.  
The default level is 2.  
Press [DNL] (1 s), then turn the MULTI control to  
While NR1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise  
reduction level by pressing [NR] (1 s), then turn the  
MULTI control to select the level from 1 to 9 or  
AUTO. The default is AUTO.  
adjust the Digital Noise Limiter level.  
The current level appear on the sub-display.  
Note:  
Digital Noise Limiter is available only for SSB, CW, FSK, and AM  
Setting the NR2 Time Constant  
modes.  
Depending on a pulse type, the DNL function may not be able to  
remove the noise.  
You can change the correlation time for NR2  
(SPAC). When in SSB mode, select the  
correlation time that allows you to hear signals  
with clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to  
select the longest correlation time that allows  
reliable reception. The longer the correlation time,  
the better the S/N ratio.  
Turning the DNL function ON when there is no pulse-type noise  
and the signal is relatively strong, it could degrade the signal  
readabilty.  
When the DNL function is ON, the high-cut filter frequency  
becomes 3.0 kHz regardless of the DSP filter settings.  
The DNL function can be used with the Beat Cancel (BC), Noise  
Reduction (NR) , and Noise Blanker functions at the same time.  
When NR2 is ON, press [NR] (1 s), then turn the  
MULTI control to select the correlation time from  
2 ms to 20 ms. The default is 20 ms.  
Note: Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the  
clarity of signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the  
conditions.  
47  
10 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
DSP FILTER FOR DATA COMMUNICATION  
(SSB/ FM)  
The DSP filter for Data Communication is designed to  
improve the reception tone readability, especially for  
PSK31 and other new digital modes.  
DSP RX MONITOR  
The DSP RX Monitor function temporarily cancels IF  
filter selection and DSP filter settings so that you can  
confirm the conditions of current reception frequency  
nearby.  
To use the DSP RX Monitor function, first assign the  
PF key on the panel (or Mic PF keys) {page 64}.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI  
control to select Menu No. 45.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “oFF” or “on” (default is  
control to select Menu No. 48.  
OFF).  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “64”.  
While Menu No. 45 is ON:  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
1 Press [FIL/ NAR].  
exit the Menu mode.  
“WDH -- nnnn” (where “nnnn” is DSP filter  
bandwidth in Hz) appears.  
4 Press [PF].  
While pressing [PF], the transceiver cancels IF  
filter selection and DSP filter settings to its default  
values. When you release [PF], the transceiver  
recovers the IF and DSP filter settings.  
2 Turn MULTI control to select the desired  
bandwidth.  
3 Press [FIL/ NAR].  
“CTR -- nnnn” (where “nnnn” is a center filter  
frequency in Hz) appears.  
4 Turn MULTI control to select the desired center  
frequency for the filter.  
5 Press [FIL/ NAR] to complete the settings.  
The following center frequencies and bandwidth  
combinations are available.  
1000/ 1500 Hz is used for the PSK31 operation and  
2210 Hz is used for the RTTY operation.  
Center  
Freq. (Hz)  
Filter bandwidth (Hz)  
1000  
1500  
2210  
50 100 250 500 1000 1500 2400  
50 100 250 500 1000 1500 2400  
50 100 250 500 1000 1500 2400  
Note: While Menu No. 45 is ON, the DSP filter bandwidth {page 46}  
cannot be changed.  
48  
10 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
PRE-AMPLIFIER  
CW REVERSE (RECEPTION)  
Switching the pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
This function pivots the BFO from the default position  
(USB) to another position (LSB) in CW mode. It is  
sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals  
from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO.  
Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] to cycle through “ATT” /  
“PRE” / “  
” (OFF) then return to “ATT”. Select  
“PRE” to turn the pre-amplifier ON. When it is ON,  
the signal is amplified approximately 12 dB.  
1 Press [MODE] until “CW” appears.  
2 Press [MODE] (1 s).  
“PRE” appears when the function is ON.  
“CW” changes to “CWR”.  
3 To recover the default BFO position, press  
[MODE] (1 s) again.  
“CWR” changes to “CW”.  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored in  
the current band. Each time you select the same  
band, the same setting will be automatically selected.  
The frequency range of each band is provided in the  
table under “ATTENUATOR”.  
ATTENUATOR  
The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals.  
This function is useful when there is strong  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] to cycle through “ATT” /  
“PRE” / “  
” (OFF) then return to “ATT”. Select  
“ATT” to activate the attenuator function. When it is  
ON, the signal is attenuated approximately 12 dB.  
“ATT” appears when the function is ON.  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored in  
the current band. Each time you select the same  
frequency band, the attenuator setting will be  
automatically recalled.  
The frequency range of each band is shown below.  
Frequency Bands  
(MHz)  
Pre-amplifier  
(Default)  
Attenuator  
(Default)  
0.03 ~ 2.5  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
49  
MEMORY FEATURES  
MEMORY CHANNELS  
STORING DATA IN MEMORY  
There are 2 methods used for storing transmission/  
reception frequencies and associated data in memory  
channels 00 to 89. Use either method, depending on  
the relationship of the reception and transmission  
frequencies you store:  
The transceiver provides you with 100 memory  
channels, numbered 00 to 99, for storing operating  
frequency data, modes and other information.  
Memory channels 00 to 89 are called Conventional  
Memory Channels. Memory channels 90 to 99 are  
designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and  
scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below.  
Simplex channels:  
RX frequency = TX frequency  
Conventional memory channels are used for storing  
data you will often recall. For example, you may  
store the frequency where you regularly meet your  
club members.  
Split-frequency channels:  
RX frequency TX frequency  
Memory channels 90 to 99 can also be used as  
simplex channels.  
Channel  
00 ~ 89  
Channel  
90 ~ 99  
Yes 1  
Parameter  
RX frequency  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT or  
XIT offset will be stored.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Simplex Channels  
(simplex)  
TX frequency  
RX mode  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
Yes 1  
(simplex)  
tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO  
is selected.  
TX mode  
Programmable VFO  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.  
No  
Yes  
Start/ End frequencies  
3 Press [QMI/ M.IN] (1 s) to enter Memory Scroll  
RX frequency step size  
TX frequency step size  
Tone frequency  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
(simplex)  
mode.  
“M.SCR” appears.  
Yes  
Yes  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone/ CTCSS ON/ OFF  
status  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [MTR/ CLR].  
Memory name  
Memory Channel Lockout  
ON/ OFF  
4 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
Yes 1  
Yes 1  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
1 Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the  
contents of the channel.  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [1], [2] for example.  
5 Press [QMI/ M.IN] again to store the data.  
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
50  
11 MEMORY FEATURES  
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL  
Split-Frequency Channels  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
There are 2 modes which allow you to retrieve  
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a  
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.  
tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO  
is selected.  
Memory Recall:  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.  
In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits  
using a frequency that you retrieve. You can  
temporarily change the frequency and associated  
data without overwriting the contents of the memory  
channel when Menu No. 07 is ON (default is OFF).  
This frequency and mode will be used for  
transmitting.  
3 Press [A/B / M/V] to select the other VFO.  
4 Select the reception frequency and mode.  
5 Press [A=B/ SPLIT] (1 s).  
Memory Scroll:  
Use this mode to check the contents of the memory  
channels without changing the current reception  
frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are  
not used for receiving and transmitting.  
” appears.  
Memory Recall  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
6 Press [QMI/ M.IN] (1 s) to enter Memory Scroll  
mode.  
mode.  
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [MTR/ CLR].  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
7 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
Continuously holding down Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] steps the transceiver through the  
memory channels until the key is released.  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [1], [2] for example.  
Memory channels which contain no data are  
skipped.  
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press  
8 Press [QMI/ M.IN] to store the data.  
[A/B / M/V] (1 s).  
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
Note: If Menu No. 07 is selected “on”, the frequency of the split-  
memory channel can be changed while using the TF-SET  
function.  
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX  
while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone  
frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.  
51  
11 MEMORY FEATURES  
Memory Scroll  
MEMORY TRANSFER  
Memory \ VFO Transfer  
1 Press [QMI/ M.IN] (1 s) to enter Memory Scroll  
mode.  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data  
from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data  
to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,  
when the frequency you want to monitor is near  
the frequency stored in a memory channel.  
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
1 Recall the desired memory channel {page 51}.  
2 Press [QMR/ MsVFO] (1 s).  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
When a simplex channel is recalled, the  
data is copied to VFO A or VFO B,  
depending on which VFO was used to recall  
the channel.  
[DWN] to step through the memory channels.  
You can also change channels by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [8], [9] for example.  
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press  
When a split channel is recalled, the RX  
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is  
copied to VFO B.  
[MTR/ CLR].  
The transceiver re-displays the memory  
channel or VFO frequency that was  
selected before you activated Memory  
Scroll.  
Note: Pressing [QMR/ MsVFO] (1 s) after temporarily changing  
the retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.  
Channel \ Channel Transfer  
Note:  
While the transceiver is in Memory Scroll mode, you can  
operate the following controls and keys only: [QMI/ M.IN],  
[MTR/ CLR], numeric keys ([0] ~ [9]), Mic [UP]/ [DWN],  
Mic [PTT], AF control, SQL control, MULTI control and [  
(POWER).  
You can also copy channel information from one  
memory channel to another. This function is  
useful when storing frequencies and associated  
data that you temporarily change in Memory  
Recall mode.  
]
Do not press [QMI/ M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll  
mode. Pressing [QMI/ M.IN] results in over-writing the  
current VFO data to the memory channel you selected.  
1 Recall the desired memory channel {page 51}.  
2 Press [QMI/ M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll  
Temporary Frequency Changes  
mode.  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in  
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change  
the data without overwriting the contents of the  
memory channel.  
To exit Memory Scroll mode, press  
[MTR/ CLR].  
3 Select the memory channel where you would  
like the data copied, using the MULTI control.  
1 Access Menu No. 07 and select “on”.  
4 Press [QMI/ M.IN] (1 s).  
Skip this step when changing only the  
associated data (not the frequency).  
Channel 00 ~ 89  
RX frequency  
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Channel 00 ~ 89  
RX frequency  
2 Recall a memory channel.  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
TX frequency  
TX frequency  
Use only the Tuning control to select a  
frequency.  
Mode for RX  
Mode for RX  
4 If necessary for future use, store the changed  
data in another memory channel. Refer to  
“Channel Channel Transfer” {below}.  
Mode for TX  
Mode for TX  
RX frequency step  
TX frequency step  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
RX frequency step  
TX frequency step  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Note: If Menu No. 07 is selected “on”, the frequency of the split-  
memory channel can be changed while using the TF-SET  
function.  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
a
a
a
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
52  
11 MEMORY FEATURES  
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES  
Channel 00 ~ 89  
RX frequency  
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Channel 90 ~ 99  
Memory channels 90 to 99 allow you to store  
frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.  
Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To  
tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,  
store the start and end frequencies for that range in  
advance.  
TX/ RX frequency  
(simplex)  
TX frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX/ RX  
(simplex)  
Mode for TX  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
RX frequency step  
TX frequency step  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
TX/ RX frequency  
step (simplex)  
2 Select the desired start frequency.  
3 Press [QMI/ M.IN] (1 s) to enter Memory Scroll  
Tone frequency  
mode.  
CTCSS frequency  
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [MTR/ CLR].  
Tone/ CTCSS  
ON/ OFF status  
Tone/ CTCSS  
ON/ OFF status  
a
a
a
4 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
to select a memory channel in the range of 90 to  
99.  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
Channel 90 ~ 99  
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Channel 00 ~ 89  
RX frequency  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [9], [0] for example.  
TX/ RX frequency  
TX frequency  
5 Press [QMI/ M.IN] to store the start frequency in  
Mode for RX  
the memory channel.  
Mode for TX/ RX  
Mode for TX  
“ENDINPUT” appears on the sub-display.  
RX frequency step  
TX frequency step  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
TX/ RX frequency  
step (simplex)  
Tone frequency  
6 Turn the Tuning control or MULTI control to select  
CTCSS frequency  
the end frequency.  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
a
a
a
7 Press [QMI/ M.IN] to store the end frequency in  
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
the memory channel.  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
Confirming Start/ End Frequencies  
When copying a memory channel 90 ~ 99 a  
channel 90 ~ 99, Memory Channel Lockout status  
changes to OFF, regardless of the original channel  
settings.  
Use this procedure to check the start and end  
frequencies that you stored in channels 90 to 99.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
The tables above illustrate how data is transferred  
between memory channels.  
mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from 90 to  
99.  
3 Press [ ] to check the start frequency and [  
]
to check the end frequency.  
53  
11 MEMORY FEATURES  
Programmable VFO  
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS  
Using the start and end frequencies that you  
stored in channels 90 to 99, Programmable VFO  
restricts the frequency range that you can tune  
with the Tuning control. One application of this  
function is to help you operate within the  
If there are memory channels that you will not recall  
in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of  
those channels.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
authorized frequency limits of your license.  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
to select the desired memory channel.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
mode.  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [ENT], [3], [4] for  
example.  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from 90 to  
99.  
3 Press [MTR/ CLR] (1 s).  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [ENT], [9], [0] for  
example.  
A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel  
data has been erased.  
Now you can only tune from the start frequency to  
the end frequency, using the Tuning control.  
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME  
You can assign a name to each memory channel. A  
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters can be  
stored.  
Note: Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI control  
changies the memory channel number while in Programmable  
VFO mode.  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
mode.  
MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer  
not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is  
described in the next chapter {page 58}.  
to select a memory channel.  
3 Press [QMR/ MsVFO].  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
to select the desired memory channel.  
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [ENT], [3], [4] for  
example.  
4 Turn the MULTI control to select the desired  
alpha-numeric character. You can move the  
cursor to the left by pressing [ ], or to the right by  
pressing [ ]. Press [CL] to erase the character  
at the cursor.  
3 Press [ENT] (1 s).  
A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the  
memory channel number to indicate the  
channel has been locked out.  
Note: You cannot name the Quick Memory channels.  
5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the  
memory channel name, press [QMR/ MsVFO] to  
store the name.  
6 When you recall a memory channel with a name,  
the name is displayed on the sub-display along  
with the memory channel number {page 51}.  
Pressing [ENT] (1 s) toggles between adding  
and removing the channel from the scan list.  
Available alpha-numeric characters  
A
O
+
B
P
C
D
E
S
1
F
T
2
G H  
I
J
K
Y
7
L
Z
8
M N  
SP  
Q R  
U
3
V W X  
/
0
4
5
6
9
“SP” represents a space character.  
54  
11 MEMORY FEATURES  
Each time [QMI/ M.IN] is pressed, the current  
VFO data is written to the Quick Memory.  
QUICK MEMORY  
Quick Memory is designed to quickly and temporarily  
save data without specifying a particular memory  
channel. Use Quick Memory to store data you will  
not use in future operating sessions. For example, as  
you tune across the band looking for DX, it is  
convenient to store stations that you want to contact.  
You can quickly jump between several different  
memory channels as you monitor them.  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset will  
also be stored.  
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
1 Press [QMR/ MsVFO].  
This transceiver provides 10 Quick Memory channels  
(“0_” to “9_”) that can store the following data:  
The current memory channel number appears.  
VFO A frequency and  
operating mode  
VFO B frequency and  
operating mode  
RIT ON/ OFF  
XIT ON/ OFF  
DSP filter bandwidth  
FINE ON/ OFF  
If there is no data stored in any Quick Memory  
channel, the data cannot be recalled to the  
current VFO, an error beep sounds.  
RIT/ XIT offset frequency  
Noise Blanker ON/ OFF  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select a Quick Memory  
channel (0 to 9).  
DSP Noise Reduction  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
DSP Beat Cancel  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
Digital Noise Limiter  
OFF/ 1 ~ 3  
3 To exit, press [QMR/ MsVFO] again.  
TX/ RX functions  
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the  
TF-SET function.  
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY  
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously  
stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective  
Quick Memory channel. When all 10 memory  
channels contain frequencies, storing one more  
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9  
off the stack (the data is lost).  
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES  
After recalling a Quick Memory channel, you can  
temporarily change the data without overwriting the  
contents of the channel. You can change the  
frequency even when you select “oFF” in Menu  
No. 07.  
The following diagram illustrates how the Quick  
Memory stacks the data in memory each time you  
press [QMI/ M.IN].  
1 Press [QMR/ MsVFO].  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select a Quick Memory  
channel (0_ to 9_).  
New data  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
21.250  
18.111  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
4 To store the changed data in the Quick Memory,  
press [QMI/ M.IN].  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
14.195  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
This action stores the new data in the current  
channel and bumps the old frequency to the  
next higher Quick Memory channel.  
New data  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
14.250  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
5 To exit, press [QMR/ MsVFO] again.  
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using  
the TF-SET function.  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
New data  
QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER  
14.085  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
This function copies the contents of the recalled  
memory channel to the VFO.  
14.250  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.  
2 Press [QMR/ MsVFO] (1 s).  
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
Note: Pressing [QMR/ MsVFO] after temporarily changing the  
recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.  
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the  
transceiver VFO.  
2 Press [QMI/ M.IN].  
55  
SCAN  
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of  
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable  
with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating  
efficiency.  
1 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] (1 s) in VFO mode.  
“VGROUP -- n” (where n represents a  
VGROUP number from 0 to 9) appears on the  
sub-display.  
This transceiver provides the following types of scans.  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select the Program  
Scan memory (VGROUP–0 to VGROUP–9). As  
you select the channel, “on” or “oFF” appears on  
the frequency display. “on” signifies that the  
selected VGROUP is active for the Program Scan  
and “oFF” signifies that the selected VGROUP is  
inactive for the Program Scan.  
Scan Type  
Purpose  
Scans the entire frequency  
range of the transceiver.  
Scans the specific frequency  
ranges stored in Memory  
channels 90 ~ 99.  
VFO Scan  
Normal  
Scan  
Program  
Scan  
All-Channel Scans all Memory channels,  
Scan  
from 00 to 99.  
Scans the specific Memory  
channel groups.  
Memory  
Scan  
Group Scan  
Configure all VGROUP channels (VGROUP–0 ~  
VGROUP–9) as “oFF” by pressing [ ].  
Note:  
While using CTCSS in FM mode, Scan stops only for the signals  
that contain the same CTCSS tone that you selected.  
Pressing Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop.  
3 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [MTR/ CLR] to return  
to the current VFO mode.  
NORMAL SCAN  
When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode,  
2 types of scanning are available.  
4 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.  
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [MTR/ CLR] to stop the  
VFO Scan.  
VFO Scan  
Note:  
The transceiver scans the entire frequency range  
of the transceiver. For example, if you are  
operating and receiving on the transceiver’s VFO  
A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans entire frequencies in  
the range of 30.00 kHz to 59.999.99 MHz. (Refer  
to available VFO frequency range in the  
Specifications.)  
While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning the  
RIT/ XIT control. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise to  
decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator  
appears on the sub-display, where P1 is the fastest speed and  
P9 is the slowest.  
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.  
PROGRAM SCAN  
Program Scan  
Program Scan monitors the range between the start  
and end frequencies that you have stored in Memory  
channels 90 ~ 99 (VGROUP–0 ~ 9). Refer to  
“STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 53} for  
details on how to store the start and end frequencies  
to Memory channels 90 ~ 99 (VGROUP–0 ~ 9).  
By programming the start and end frequency in  
Memory channels 90 ~ 99 {page 53}, you can limit  
the scanning frequency range. Since there are 10  
memory channels (90 ~ 99) available for  
specifying the start and end frequency, you can  
select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to  
scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX  
station on a certain frequency but the station may  
appear on a slightly higher or lower frequency.  
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels  
(VGROUP 0 to 9) and sequentially scan the frequency  
ranges that you stored in these channels. If the  
current VFO frequency falls within the selected  
VGROUP frequency range, the Program Scan starts  
from the VGROUP number and then continues to  
scan the next larger VGROUP number. If the current  
VFO frequency is outside all of the VGROUP  
VFO SCAN  
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is  
available for the current VFO. When the Program  
Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan  
Group is selected for the Program Scan, the  
transceiver also scans the entire frequency range  
available for the current VFO.  
frequency ranges, the Program Scan starts from the  
smallest VGROUP number that is selected as “on”  
(each VGROUP can be set to either “on” or “oFF”).  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
The memory channel numbers 90 ~ 99 have alias  
names, “VGROUP”. “VGROUP–0” represents  
channel 90, “VGROUP–1” represents channel 91,  
“VGROUP–2” represents channel 92, and so on up to  
“VGROUP–9” which represents channel 99.  
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] (1 s).  
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are  
programmed in VGROUP–0 to 9 (Memory channel  
numbers 90 ~ 99 in other words):  
3 Turn the MULTI control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
to select the memory channel (VGROUP–0 to  
56  
12 SCAN  
VGROUP–9). As you select the Memory Channel,  
“on” or “oFF” appears on the main frequency  
display. “on” signifies that the memory channel is  
active for the Program Scan and “oFF” signifies  
that the memory channel group is inactive for the  
Program Scan.  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED  
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for  
each memory channel from 90 to 99 so that the  
Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To  
specify the slow down frequency points, first program  
the start and end frequencies into a memory channel  
(90 ~ 99) {page 53}.  
4 To activate the Program Scan frequency range,  
select the desired VGROUP number by turning the  
MULTI control. Then, press [ ] to select “on” for  
the VGROUP (channel). When a channel is  
activated for the Program Scan, “on” appears on  
the display.  
1 Access Menu No. 08 to confirm that the function is  
ON (default is ON).  
2 You can further configure the slow down frequency  
width. Access Menu No. 09 to select the range  
from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).  
Note: At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from 90 to  
99) must be programmed and selected to perform the Program Scan.  
If no VGROUP (memory channel 90 ~ 99) is selected for the Program  
Scan, the transceiver performs the VFO Scan {above}.  
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 09, the  
Program Scan slows down to a ±500 Hz width, centering the  
frequency you marked below.  
3 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) and turn the MULTI control  
to recall the memory channel (90 ~ 99) for which  
you want to specify the scan slow down  
frequencies.  
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [MTR/ CLR] to return  
4 Press [ ]/ [ ] to confirm the start ([ ]) or end  
to the current VFO mode.  
([ ]) frequency.  
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program  
5 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency  
point that you want the Program Scan to slow  
down. Press [QMI/ M.IN] to mark the slow down  
frequency point. The “ ” icon appears.  
Scan.  
To quickly move towards a desired frequency  
while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the  
MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
6 Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down  
frequency points. You can specify a maximum of  
5 frequency points for each channel.  
Turning the RIT/ XIT control clockwise  
decreases the scan speed and  
counterclockwise increases the speed, except  
while in FM mode. The current scan speed is  
shown on the display; P1 is the fastest speed  
and P9 is the slowest.  
7 If you want to clear a slow down frequency point  
that you previously stored, select the frequency  
that you stored. Press [QMI/ M.IN] at this  
frequency spot where “ ” appears.  
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops  
on a frequency where a signal is present. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel  
for a short time (Time-Operated mode) or until  
the signal drops out (Carrier-Operated mode),  
depending on which mode you select via Menu  
No. 11 {page 58}.  
A confirmation beep sounds and the  
transceiver “ ” disappears.  
If you want to clear all the slow down frequency  
points at once, perform the Channel \  
Channel Transfer to overwrite the memory data  
to the same memory channel {page 52}. This  
operation removes all the frequency points that  
you stored.  
7 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or  
[MTR/ CLR].  
8 Press [A/B / M/V] to return to VFO mode.  
Note:  
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold while in FM mode, Scan may fail to stop at a  
channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL  
control slightly counterclockwise.  
9 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan  
with the slow down frequency point(s).  
Note:  
If you press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] before storing any frequency range  
for memory channels 90 to 99, the transceiver starts VFO scan.  
During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ XIT control to  
adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counter-  
clockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The Program Scan  
speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during  
the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.  
When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges  
that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the  
current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory  
channel is used.  
You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.  
The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the  
memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.  
You can specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point in  
FM mode but it does not function.  
When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the  
MULTI control, turning the control clockwise causes Scan to jump  
to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end  
frequency.  
SCAN HOLD  
This function stops Program Scan for approximately  
5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the  
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the  
MULTI control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.  
While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off  
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 05 setting.  
To use this function, access Menu No. 10, and select  
“on”. The default is OFF.  
57  
12 SCAN  
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN  
MEMORY SCAN  
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory  
channels that contain frequency data in sequence,  
ignoring the Memory Group number.  
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which  
you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only  
a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).  
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode  
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal  
is present, regardless of the operating mode. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel for a  
short time (Time-Operated mode) or until the signal  
drops out (Carrier-Operated mode). Use Menu No.  
11 to select the mode. The default is “to” (Time-  
Operated).  
via Menu No. 11.  
2 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
mode.  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold to mute the speaker.  
4 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] (1 s) to enter Scan Group  
SCAN RESUME METHOD  
Select mode.  
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or  
memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then  
continues scanning according to which resume mode  
you have selected. You can choose one of the  
Turn the MULTI control to select the Memory  
channel group.  
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channel 0 ~  
9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory channel 10  
~ 19 and so on up to MGROUP–9 which  
following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.  
represents Memory channel 90 ~ 99 {page 53}.  
Time-Operated mode (“to”)  
5 As you select the Memory Groups using the  
MULTI control, press [ ] to select “oFF” for all  
Memory Groups.  
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or  
memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,  
then continues to scan, even if the signal is still  
present.  
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to Memory  
Recall mode.  
Carrier-Operated mode (“co”)  
7 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start All-channel Scan.  
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or  
memory channel) until the signal drops out. There  
is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and  
scan resumption.  
Scan starts from the current memory channel  
and ascends up through the channel numbers.  
(The scan direction cannot be changed.)  
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,  
turn the MULTI control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN].  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to enter Menu mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select Menu No. 11.  
8 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or  
3 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “to” (Time-Operated) or  
[MTR/ CLR].  
“co” (Carrier-Operated).  
Note:  
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a  
signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly  
counterclockwise.  
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to complete the setting  
and exit Menu mode.  
You can lock out the memory channels that you  
prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer  
to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 54}.  
58  
12 SCAN  
Performing Group Scan  
GROUP SCAN  
Group Scan starts with the smallest group number  
and repeats the sequence. For example, if you  
selected “on” for MGROUP–3, MGROUP–5, and  
MGROUP–7, the transceiver scans the channels in  
MGROUP–3 / MGROUP–5 / MGROUP–7 /  
MGROUP–3 and so on.  
100 memory channels are divided into 10 groups so  
that you can select one or more groups to be  
scanned, depending on the situation.  
Memory Group  
When you store frequency data in a memory channel  
{page 50}, the memory channel belongs to one of 10  
groups as shown below.  
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-Operated mode  
via Menu No. 11.  
2 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
Memory  
Channel  
No.  
Memory  
Channel  
No.  
Memory Group  
No.  
Memory Groupl  
No.  
mode.  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold.  
0 ~ 9  
MGROUP–0 50 ~ 59 MGROUP–5  
4 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start Memory Group  
10 ~ 19 MGROUP–1 60 ~ 69 MGROUP–6  
20 ~ 29 MGROUP–2 70 ~ 79 MGROUP–7  
30 ~ 39 MGROUP–3 80 ~ 89 MGROUP–8  
40 ~ 49 MGROUP–4 90 ~ 99 MGROUP–9  
Scan.  
Scan ascends up through the channel numbers.  
(The scan direction cannot be changed.)  
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,  
turn the MULTI control or press and hold Mic  
[UP]/ [DWN].  
Scan Group Select  
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or  
You can select one or more groups to be scanned.  
First, select the groups to be scanned.  
[MTR/ CLR].  
Note:  
1 Press [A/B / M/V] (1 s) to enter Memory Recall  
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a  
signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly  
counterclockwise.  
mode.  
“M.CH” appears.  
When the current channel is within one of the groups that you  
selected, Scan starts with the current channel.  
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] (1 s) to enter Scan Group  
Select mode.  
When the current channel is outside all the groups that you  
selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger than  
and closest to the group number of the current channel.  
3 As you turn the MULTI control, the MGROUP  
number on the sub-display changes.  
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.  
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channel 0 ~  
9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory channel 10  
~ 19 and so on up to MGROUP–9 which  
represents Memory channel 90 ~ 99.  
4 Press [ ] to select “on” to add the group to the  
Group Scan list.  
If you do not wish the selected Group to be  
scanned, press [ ] to select “oFF”.  
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to exit the Scan Group  
Select mode.  
59  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
ANTENNAS  
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/  
50 MHz band on the TX/ RX unit rear panel {page  
16}.  
t
2 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] (1 s) to select “1 ANT”  
s
or “ANT 2”.  
If the external antenna tuner (AT-300) is  
connected to the ANT 1 connector, select  
ANT 2 to use the internal antenna tuner. The  
internal antenna tuner is automatically  
bypassed if the external antenna tuner  
(AT-300) is connected to ANT 1.  
Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] (1 s) to select ANT 1 or  
ANT 2.  
t
s
1 ANT” or “ANT 2” appears to indicate which  
antenna is selected.  
3 Press [AT] momentarily.  
s
AT T” appears, indicating that the antenna  
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).  
The ANT 1/ ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored  
in the antenna band memory. Next time you select  
the same band, the same antenna will be  
automatically selected.  
4 Press [AT] (1 s).  
CW mode is automatically selected and tuning  
begins.  
Antenna Selection Frequency Range (MHz)  
s
AT T” blinks and the LED lights red.  
0.03 ~ 2.5  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
To cancel tuning, press [AT] again.  
If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely  
high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in  
Morse code) sounds and the internal antenna  
tuner is bypassed. Before attempting to tune  
again, adjust the antenna system to lower the  
SWR.  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
Note: Connect an external tuner to the ANT 1 connector only, then  
select ANT 1. The internal antenna tuner will be automatically  
bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.  
5 Monitor the display and check that tuning has  
successfully finished.  
s
If the tuning was successful, “AT T” stops  
blinking and the red LED turns OFF.  
APO (Auto Power OFF)  
If tuning does not finish within approximately  
20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code)  
sounds. Press [AT] to stop the alarm and  
tuning.  
You can set the transceiver to switch OFF  
automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or  
adjusted for a certain period of time. One minute  
before the transceiver switches OFF, CHECK” is  
output in Morse code.  
If you want the transceiver to stay in  
transmission mode after the tuning completes,  
access Menu No. 25 and select “on”.  
Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI control  
to access Menu No. 59.  
If you access Menu No. 26 and select “on”, received  
signals will also pass through the internal antenna  
tuner. When this function is ON, “R AT” appears.  
This may reduce interference on the receive  
frequency.  
Select the APO time from “oFF”, “60”, “120”, or “180”  
minutes.  
t
Note:  
The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.  
Note:  
The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key  
presses, no control adjustments, and no command (COM  
connector) sequences are detected.  
The internal antenna tuner will not tune outside the available  
transmission frequency limits.  
Pressing [AT] for more than one second while transmitting,  
interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.  
While using CW Full Break-in, the internal antenna tuner will be  
in-line for both transmission and reception.  
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER  
Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds.  
“AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.  
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {pages  
2, 4}, matching the impedance of the coaxial cable  
and antenna is important. To adjust the impedance  
between the antenna and the transceiver, you have  
the choice of using the internal antenna tuner  
(TS-480SAT only) or an external antenna tuner. This  
section describes how to use the internal antenna  
tuner. For the external antenna tuner, consult the  
instruction manual that comes with the tuner.  
Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.  
This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a  
malfunction.  
Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the  
internal antenna tuner may not re-tune. This happens because  
of an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance.  
If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates  
smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,  
then attempt to tune again.  
Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the  
transceiver conditions.  
1 Select the transmit frequency.  
60  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
To return to normal operation, press [ATT/PRE/  
ANT1/2] until both the ATT and the PRE icons  
disappear.  
Presetting  
After each successful tuning session, the AT  
Preset memory function stores the position of the  
tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of  
the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna  
tuner bands (see the following table) and for each  
antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).  
AUTO MODE  
You can configure a maximum of 32 frequency  
borders (VFO A and B) to change the operating mode  
automatically as you change the VFO frequency.  
Press [AT] momentarily.  
s
AT T” will appear, showing that the antenna  
As a default, the following modes are programmed on  
each operating band.  
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).  
Each time you go across the antenna tuner  
band, the AT Preset memory is automatically  
recalled to position the tuning capacitor without  
the need for retuning. If no preset data exists  
for a particular band/ antenna combination,  
then the default data of 50 is used.  
0.03 MHz ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB  
9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB  
To add the frequency borders to the Auto Mode  
selection:  
1 Press and hold [MODE]+[ ] (POWER) to turn  
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum  
matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band  
has the preset data.  
the transceiver ON.  
AT Preset Frequency Range (MHz)  
0.03 ~ 1.85  
2.50 ~ 3.525  
3.575 ~ 3.725  
4.10 ~ 6.90  
1.85 ~ 2.50  
3.525 ~ 3.575  
3.725 ~ 4.10  
6.90 ~ 7.03  
“AUTOMODE” appears on the sub-display.  
2 Select an Auto Mode frequency memory channel  
number by turning the MULTI control. Auto  
Memory channels 00 to 31 are available.  
7.03 ~ 7.10  
7.10 ~ 7.50  
3 Turn the Tuning control to select a desired  
frequency border (or enter the frequency with the  
keypad {page 34}) to change the operating mode.  
7.50 ~ 10.50  
14.10 ~ 14.50  
18.50 ~ 21.15  
21.50 ~ 25.50  
29.00 ~ 30.00  
51.00 ~ 52.00  
53.00 ~ 60.00  
10.50 ~ 14.10  
14.50 ~ 18.50  
21.15 ~ 21.50  
25.50 ~ 29.00  
30.00 ~ 51.00  
52.00 ~ 53.00  
4 Press [MODE] or [MODE] (1 s) until the desired  
communication mode appears {page 19}.  
5 Repeat steps 2 ~ 4 until you have added all the  
External Antenna Tuner type  
data.  
6 Press [MTR/ CLR] to exit the Auto Mode  
If you want to use the external antenna tuner,  
AT-300 with the TS-480 transceiver, access  
Menu No. 27 and confirm that “At1” is selected  
(default). “At2” is reserved for future updates.  
frequency configuration.  
The table below shows the default Auto Mode  
frequency borders for the transceiver. When you  
access Menu No. 02 and select “on”, “AUTO”  
appears. The transceiver automatically selects the  
mode; LSB for frequencies below 9.5 MHz and USB  
for frequencies greater than or equal to 9.5 MHz  
(default).  
Note: When the AT-300 is used with the TS-480HX transceiver,  
TX power is automatically reduced to 100 W (AM mode:  
25 W). Also, the AT-300 cannot be used for 50 MHz operation.  
ATTENUATOR  
Channel No.  
Data  
Operating mode  
The attenuator function is useful when extremely  
strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency.  
When these type of signals exist nearby your  
receiving frequency, the AGC function may be  
erroneously controlled by the strong signals, rather  
than by the target receiving signal. If this happens,  
the target receiving signal can be masked and buried  
by the strong signals. In this case, turn the  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
0
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
1
2
3
0.03 MHz  
LSB <  
9.5 MHz  
9.5 MHz  
USB ≤  
60.0 MHz  
Attenuator function ON. When it is ON, the signal is  
attenuated approximately 12 dB.  
1 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] until the ATT icon  
appears on the display.  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
31  
“ATT” appears when it is turned ON.  
61  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
The table below is an example of how to add the  
frequency border of 1.62 MHz/ AM into memory. With  
this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below  
1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and  
USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.  
accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it  
ON in order to detect unexpected errors and  
malfunctions.  
You can also change the output level of the beeps by  
accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting “1” to “9” or  
“oFF”.  
Channel No.  
Data  
Operating mode  
The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you  
which mode is selected when you change operating  
modes.  
1.62 MHz  
AM  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
0
0.03 MHz  
AM <  
1
2
3
1.62 MHz  
When you change operating modes, the following  
Morse code sounds:  
1.62 MHz  
LSB <  
9.5 MHz  
Mode  
LSB  
USB  
CW  
Morse Code Output  
· – ··  
·· –  
(L)  
(U)  
(C)  
9.5 MHz  
USB <  
60.0 MHz  
– · – ·  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
31  
CWR  
FSK  
FSR  
AM  
– · – · · – ·  
· – ·  
(CR)  
(R)  
The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency  
points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver  
selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from  
1.62 MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to  
9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and  
USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60.0 MHz. If multiple  
data contains the same frequency but a different  
mode is entered into memory, the lowest numbered  
memory channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.  
· – · · – ·  
· –  
(RR)  
(A)  
FM  
·· – ·  
(F)  
The transceiver also generates the following warning,  
confirmation, and malfunction beeps.  
Beeps  
What it means  
Channel No.  
Data  
Operating mode  
0.03 MHz  
AM <  
1.62 MHz  
A high pitched short beep A valid key is pressed.  
1.62 MHz  
AM  
0
A high pitched double  
beep  
When a secondary  
function is selected.  
A key entry is accepted,  
A high pitched long beep Scan starts, or AT tune  
has completed.  
2.0 MHz  
CW  
1.62 MHz  
CW <  
1
2
3
2.0 MHz  
7.0 MHz  
LSB  
A regular short beep  
A function is turned OFF.  
2.0 MHz  
LSB <  
9.5MHz  
A low pitched short beep An invalid key is pressed.  
The internal PLL circuit  
“UL” in Morse code  
9.5 MHz  
LSB  
unlock status is detected.  
9.5 MHz  
FM <  
53.0 MHz  
CW Auto Tune cannot be  
completed, or an invalid  
frequency is entered.  
AT Tune cannot be  
completed within the  
specified time.  
The antenna’s SWR is  
too high (over 10:1) to  
perform AT Tune.  
1 minute before the APO  
(Auto Power Off) function  
switches the transceiver  
OFF. A protection circuit  
is ON. Invalid voltage is  
detected.  
“S” in Morse code  
“5” in Morse code  
“SWR” in Morse code  
53.0 MHz  
USB <  
60.0 MHz  
53.0 MHz  
FM  
31  
To activate the Auto Mode function,  
1 press [MENU/ F.LOCK].  
2 Turn the MULTI control to select Menu No. 02.  
“CHECK” in Morse code  
3 Press [ ] to select “on”.  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
exit Menu mode.  
Waiting for a CW  
message to be recorded.  
The current message  
memory is full.  
“BT” in Morse code  
“AR” in Morse code  
BEEP FUNCTION  
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,  
error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.  
Although you can turn the beep function OFF by  
62  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
DISPLAY  
LOCK FUNCTIONS  
BRIGHTNESS  
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION  
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected  
from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.  
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to  
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or  
changing the current settings.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to access Menu No. 00.  
Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] (1 s) to turn the Frequency  
Lock function ON or OFF.  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “oFF”, “1”, “2”, “3”, or “4”.  
“ ” appears while this function is ON.  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
exit Menu mode.  
KEY ILLUMINATION  
The Remote Control panel key illumination can be  
switched ON or OFF.  
The following keys and controls are disabled by  
Frequency Lock:  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to access Menu No. 01.  
Tuning control  
QMI/ M.IN  
CW.T  
MULTI control  
SCAN/ SG.SEL  
QMR/ MsVFO  
MHz  
ENT  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “oFF” or “on”.  
MODE  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
exit Menu mode.  
A/B / M/V  
Mic [UP]  
A=B/ SPLIT  
Mic [DWN]  
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL  
When you connect an external HF or 50 MHz linear  
amplifier to the transceiver using the REMOTE  
connector, select “1”, “2”, or “3” to activate the  
internal relay and/ or DC output (12 V) so you can  
interface with the HF/ 50 MHz linear amplifier {page  
80}. The DC output (12 V) works without any  
annoying chattering sounds (“1”) but the output  
current is limited to 10 mA. If your linear amplifier  
control circuit draws more than DC 12 V/ 10 mA, use  
the relay switching (“2” or “3”) instead.  
Note:  
After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI control and  
]/ [ ] are still available in Menu mode.  
[
After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the  
transmission frequency with the Tuning control while in TF-SET  
mode.  
After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI control is still  
available for selections other than frequency and memory  
channel changes.  
After activating Frequency Lock, [MTR/ CLR] may be available in  
some situations.  
Also, some linear amplifiers require a long  
transmission delay time because of the slow antenna  
relay switching time. In this case, select “3” for the  
slow switching (25 ms delay).  
TUNING CONTROL LOCK FUNCTION  
The Tuning control lock function disables the Tuning  
control. The function can be used in the following  
situations:  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to select Menu No. 28 (HF) or  
29 (50 MHz).  
You do not want to change the operating  
frequency while you are driving the car.  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “oFF”, “1”, “2”, or “3”.  
To use the Tuning control lock function, first assign  
the function to the PF key on the Remote Control  
panel (or Mic PF keys).  
Parameter  
Linear Amp. control  
oFF (default)  
All controls  
Disabled  
DC output (12 V) Enabled  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI  
1
2
3
Relay  
Disabled  
10 ms  
control to select Menu No. 48.  
TX delay  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “65”.  
DC output (12 V) Enabled  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
Relay  
TX delay  
Enabled  
10 ms  
exit the Menu mode.  
DC output (12 V) Enabled  
4 Press [PF].  
Relay  
TX delay  
Enabled  
25 ms  
“ ” appears and the Tuning control is now locked.  
To return to normal operation, press [PF] again.  
Note: If CW Full Break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay is  
applied regardless of the settings in Menu Nos. 28 and 29.  
63  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
MICROPHONE PF KEYS  
RX DSP EQUALIZER  
When using the optional MC-47 microphone with the  
MJ-88 plug adaptor, you can customize the functions  
of the Microphone PF1 (CALL), PF2 (VFO), PF3  
(MR), and PF4 (PF) keys. You can assign the  
following types of functions to these keys via Menu  
Nos. 49 ~ 52:  
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO  
Use Menu No. 18 to change the receiver frequency  
responses of the target signal. You can select one  
from 8 different receiver profiles including the default  
flat response. Selecting any of the following items  
t
Directly select a Menu No. without pressing  
[MENU/ F.LOCK] and turning the MULTI control.  
from the Menu causes “R EQ” to appear on the  
display.  
Activate the same function as one of the Remote  
Control panel keys.  
Off (oFF):  
The flat frequency response (default).  
One of the following functions can be assigned to  
each PF key. Selecting “99” assigns no function to  
the PF key.  
High boost 1 (hb1):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies.  
High boost 2 (hb2):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies but lower  
audio frequency attenuation is less than High  
boost1 (hb1).  
PF KEY  
You can program the Remote Control panel [PF] key  
to assign a function that you frequently use. The  
default is VOICE1 for the optional Voice Guide and  
Storage unit, VGS-1 {page 68}. You can assign one  
of the functions in “MICROPHONE PF KEYS” {above}  
to this PF key, accessing Menu No. 48.  
Formant pass (FP):  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies  
outside the normal voice frequency range.  
Bass boost 1 (bb1):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies.  
Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
Number  
0 ~ 60  
61  
Function  
Menu No. 00 ~ 60  
VOICE1  
Number  
80  
Function  
M.IN  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies but higher  
audio frequency attenuation is less than Bass  
boost1 (bb1).  
81  
CW.T  
CH1  
Conventional (c):  
Attenuates 2 kHz or more audio frequency slightly.  
62  
VOICE2  
82  
User (U):  
63  
RX Monitor  
83  
CH2  
Reserved for the ARCP software. Off (flat) is  
programmed at the factory as a default.  
DSP RX  
Monitor  
64  
84  
CH3  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Freq. Lock  
Send (TX)  
TX tune  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
FINE  
RX MONITOR  
RX monitor disables the squelch function temporarily  
to monitor the current frequency activities.  
CLR  
MTR  
LSB USB  
CW FSK  
MHz  
To use the RX Monitor function, first assign the  
function to the PF key on the Remote Control panel  
(or Mic PF keys).  
ANT1/2  
FM  
AM  
NB  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI  
TF-SET  
NR  
control to select Menu No. 48.  
QMR  
QMI  
BC  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “63”.  
DNL  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
SPLIT  
A/B  
exit the Menu mode.  
4 Press [PF].  
M/V  
While [PF] is pressed, the speaker unmutes.  
A=B  
SCAN  
MsVFO  
No function  
64  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
TIME-OUT TIMER  
TX MONITOR  
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each  
transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long  
accidental transmission.  
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going  
transmission sound. This is convenient when you  
want to check the modulation sound quality of the  
transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK  
signal that the transceiver is transmitting.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn the MULTI  
control to access Menu No. 22.  
1 Press [PWR/ 4/ TX MON] (1 s).  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “oFF”, “3”, “5”, “10”, “20”, or  
“30” minutes.  
2 The current TX monitor setting appears on the  
sub-display.  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the settings and  
exit Menu mode.  
3 Turn the MULTI control to select the monitor  
sound level from “oFF”, and “1” to “9”.  
4 Press [MTR/ CLR] to store the selected TX  
TRANSVERTER  
monitor level.  
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-480  
operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can  
use this TS-480 transceiver as a transverter exciter.  
Consult the instruction manual that came with the  
transverter for interfacing to the TS-480 transceiver.  
Note:  
We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB,  
AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.  
The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX  
monitor function. Use the TX sidetone function to monitor CW  
transmissions (Menu Nos. 13 and 34).  
Frequency Display  
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1 or ANT 2  
TX POWER  
connector from the TX/ RX unit.  
You can adjust the transmission output power by  
pressing [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI] and turning the MULTI  
control. If more precise power adjustment is  
required, access Menu No. 21 and select “on”. When  
this function is activated, the power adjustment steps  
change as shown in the table below.  
2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the  
transceiver.  
The transverter will use this frequency as  
the reference for converting frequencies.  
3 Access Menu No. 23, and select “on”.  
The output power is automatically set to the  
lowest power for that frequency (default).  
Refer to “TX POWER” {below}.  
TS-480SAT  
Menu No. 21 Menu No. 21  
Band  
Mode  
OFF  
ON  
4 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting  
SSB/ CW/ 5 ~ 100 W 5 ~ 100 W  
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
and exit the Menu mode.  
HF band  
5 Press [ENT], then set the target converting  
5 ~ 25 W  
5 ~ 25 W  
AM  
frequency using the numeric keys.  
in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
SSB/ CW/ 5 ~ 100 W 5 ~ 100 W  
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
6 Press [ENT] to complete the entry.  
50 MHz  
7 The transceiver displays the target transverter  
frequency instead of the actual operating  
frequency.  
5 ~ 25 W  
5 ~ 25 W  
AM  
in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
Note: When using a transverter, not all the functions of this  
TS-480HX  
Band  
transceiver are available.  
Menu No. 21 Menu No. 21  
Mode  
Transmission Output Power  
OFF  
ON  
SSB/ CW/ 5 ~ 200 W 5 ~ 200 W  
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
If Menu No. 23 is selected “on” {above}, the  
transceiver automatically decreases the output  
power to 5 watts. However, if you do not wish to  
decrease the output power, you can turn this  
function OFF. Access Menu No. 24 and select  
“oFF”. The transceiver transmits at full power  
even if Menu No. 23 is ON {above}.  
HF band  
5 ~ 50 W  
5 ~ 50 W  
AM  
in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
SSB/ CW/ 5 ~ 100 W 5 ~ 100 W  
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
50 MHz  
5 ~ 25 W  
5 ~ 25 W  
AM  
in steps of 5 in steps of 1  
Note:  
The output power settings are stored independently for HF and  
50 MHz. As shown in the table above, you can also store  
different output power settings for AM and other modes for HF  
bands and the 50 MHz band.  
If the TS-480HX transceiver is connected to the AT-300 external  
antenna tuner, the TX power is automatically reduced to 100 W  
(AM mode: 25 W).  
65  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
TX TUNE  
QUICK DATA TRANSFER  
The TX Tune function allows you to adjust the  
antenna length, or tune the linear amplifier while  
transmitting a continuous CW signal.  
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and  
conveniently transfer the reception frequency and  
mode to another compatible transceiver. Compatible  
transceivers include:  
To use the TX Tune function, first assign the function  
to a PF key on the Remote Control panel (or Mic PF  
keys) {page 64}.  
TS-480HX/ SAT  
TS-570S/ 570D  
TS-2000  
TS-870S  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI  
Data transfer could be useful while contesting. A  
spotting station that is searching for new contest  
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to  
the running (main) station.  
control to select Menu No. 48.  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select “67”.  
3 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to store the setting and  
exit the Menu mode.  
SETTING UP  
4 Press [PF].  
Equipment Needed  
The transceiver automatically switches to CW  
mode, and transmits a continuous carrier.  
The transceiver selects the SWR meter  
function automatically.  
In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following  
equipment is required:  
Transfer to TS-480HX/ SAT, TS-2000, TS-570, or  
TS-870S:  
While in TX Tune mode, most keys are  
disabled.  
One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a  
DB-9 female connector at both ends.  
The default output power is configured as  
10 watts. However, you can adjust the output  
power using [PWR/ 4/ TX MONI] and the  
MULTI control if necessary. The transceiver  
stores the new output power setting when you  
exit the TX Tune mode.  
Connections  
For diagrams on how to connect the 2 transceivers,  
refer to “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT”  
{page 76}.  
5 Press [PF] again to exit the TX Tune mode.  
USING QUICK TRANSFER  
When connecting with another TS-480HX/ SAT,  
TS-2000, TS-570, or TS-870S, use the same COM  
connector baud rate on each transceiver.  
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.  
Transferring Data  
The TS-480HX/ SAT transceiver works as the Master,  
sending data to the Slave transceiver.  
1 Turn ON the Transfer function of each transceiver.  
On the TS-480HX/ SAT, access Menu No. 53  
and select “on”. For the compatible  
transceiver, refer to the instruction manual that  
came with the transceiver.  
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an  
operating frequency and mode.  
3 On the Master, press [QMI/ M.IN].  
When using another TS-480HX/ SAT as the  
Slave, “PC” appears on the Slave.  
The displayed data is stored in Quick Memory  
channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the  
Slave.  
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency is  
added to the reception frequency to be transferred.  
Receiving Data  
The TS-480HX/ SAT transceiver works as the Slave,  
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The  
Slave can receive data using either Quick Memory  
channel 0 or the VFO.  
66  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each  
COMPUTER CONTROL  
transceiver.  
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can  
change the computer into an electronic console from  
which you can remotely control functions of the  
transceiver. This capability makes remote operation  
of your transceiver possible from across the room,  
from another room, or when coupled with other  
commercially available products and where lawful,  
from another city, state, or country via a telephone  
connection.  
On the TS-480HX/ SAT, access Menu No. 53  
and select “on”. For the compatible  
transceiver, refer to the instruction manual that  
came with the transceiver.  
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 54 and select  
either “oFF” (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or “on”  
(the VFO).  
The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).  
Note:  
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate operation  
You can use the Remote Control panel controls while using  
computer control. Settings done from the Remote Control panel  
are effective immediately.  
to send data.  
For the correct method, refer to the instruction  
manual that came with the transceiver.  
After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values and  
settings on the Remote Control panel are restored.  
Note:  
If you always use the TS-480HX/ SAT for receiving only, activate  
the TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 55 to avoid  
unintentional transmission.  
SETTING UP  
When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a  
simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data on both  
VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to OFF.  
Equipment Needed  
A PC equipped with a COM (serial) port  
When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with  
split frequencies, the received data replaces the data only on the  
TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is  
not changed.  
One straight cable. This cable must have a DB-9  
female connector at one end, and a DB-9 or a  
DB-25 female connector that mates with the COM  
port of your computer at the other end.  
Transceiver control application  
To create your programs, access the KENWOOD  
website (http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/  
amateur.html) and download the TS-480HX/ SAT  
command reference documents (PDF format) for  
details.  
Connections  
Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy.  
Refer to the diagram in “CONNECTING  
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 76}.  
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer, switch  
OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer.  
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS  
In order to control the transceiver by computer, you  
must first choose the communication parameters.  
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver  
control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and  
no parity.  
2 On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate  
via Menu No. 56.  
The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.  
4800 bps is used for the Master/ Slave  
operation only (Parity ON and 2 stop bits).  
67  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
CONTROLLING THE TS-480 FROM PC  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT  
(OPTIONAL)  
If a PC and the TS-480HX/ SAT are connected using  
a serial cable {page 76}, you can remotely control the  
functions of the TS-480 from a PC. Download the  
free ARCP-480 software from the following URL.  
The optional VGS-1 unit allows you to record a  
maximum of 30-second voice message to 3 different  
memory channels. After recording a message via  
your transceiver microphone, you can then transmit  
those recorded messages. It also announces the key  
function and frequencies each time you press a key  
(Voice announcement). Since the incoming reception  
signal is processed in digital data in the transceiver,  
the VGS-1 can be configured to store the incoming  
audio signals constantly in the background. If you  
wish, you can store the last 30-second of the  
incoming signal to the VGS-1 for the later playback  
(Constant recording).  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur.html  
The detailed remote controlling instructions are  
available in accompanied documents and help file.  
REMOTE CONTROLLING THE TS-480 ON THE  
NETWORK  
In addition to the ARCP-480 program, the ARHP-10  
program can also be downloaded from the above  
site. This ARHP-10 program is a ARCP-480 host  
program that allows a user who is connected in the  
network to remote control the TS-480 transceiver  
from a distant location. If you make interface cables  
that transfer the audio between the TS-480  
transceiver and PC on the host transceiver, you can  
receive signals and transmit your voice over the  
network. For detailed information, download the  
ARHP-10 program and consult accompanied  
documents.  
For information on how to install the VGS-1 unit, refer  
to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 81}.  
RECORDING MESSAGES  
This section explains how to record a single  
message.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode {page 19}.  
Select a mode that you wish to transmit.  
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ 8] to switch the  
function OFF.  
3 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC] (1 s) to record the message  
for channel 1.  
BT in Morse code sounds and “AP1 –”  
appears.  
To quit recording your message, press  
[MTR/ CLR].  
4 Press and hold [CH1/ 1/ REC], then begin  
speaking into your microphone.  
Three channels are available for recording  
messages. Press channel key [CH2/ 2/ REC]  
or [CH3/ 3/ REC] in place of [CH1/ 1/ REC], in  
step 3, to record the message on a different  
channel.  
While the Constant Recording is working, CH3  
is unavailable for the message recording.  
5 Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have  
finished recording your message.  
Also when the maximum recording time  
passes, recording automatically stops.  
The contents of the channel is overwritten with  
the new message.  
“FLASH WR” appears while the transceiver is  
storing the message data to the VGS-1 flash  
memory.  
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on  
another channel.  
Note: Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels recording in progress and  
clears the memory channel.  
68  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
5 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1/ 1/ REC],  
[CH2/ 2/ REC], or [CH3/ 3/ REC]) while the  
first message is being played.  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK  
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3  
to check or to send. It is also possible to make a  
longer message by consecutively playing back the  
messages of more than one channel, linking them  
together.  
Up to 3 channels can be queued.  
6 Release Mic [PTT].  
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked  
message by using the Repeat function. To switch this  
function ON, access Menu No. 31 and select “on”  
(default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval time  
in Menu No. 32 (default is 10 seconds).  
Erasing a Recorded Message  
1 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC] (1 s) or  
[CH2/ 2/ REC] (1 s) or [CH3/ 3/ REC] (1 s) to  
select the message which you want to erase.  
Note:  
“APn – –” appear, where “n” represents the  
channel number.  
Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels playback in progress.  
The settings in Menu Nos. 31 and 32 are shared with CW  
Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”  
{page 40}.  
2 To erase the recorded message, press and  
hold the same key as in step 1 ([CH1/ 1/ REC],  
[CH2/ 2/ REC], or [CH3/ 3/ REC]), while  
simultaneously pressing [MTR/ CLR].  
Checking Messages  
A beep sounds and the message is erased.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
Changing Inter-message Interval Time  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages.  
Use Menu No. 32, and select the time in the range  
of 0 to 60 seconds.  
Confirm the VOX function is OFF.  
2 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC], [CH2/ 2/ REC], or  
[CH3/ 3/ REC], depending on which channel  
you want to check.  
Changing Message Playback Volume  
For example, “AP 1– –” appear while playing  
back the message in channel 1.  
Turning the AF control does not change the  
volume for the message playback. To change the  
message playback volume , access Menu No. 14  
to select the playback volume level from “1” to “9”  
or “oFF”.  
To interrupt playback, press [MTR/ CLR].  
CONSTANT RECORDING  
3 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1/ 1/ REC],  
[CH2/ 2/ REC], or [CH3/ 3/ REC]) while the  
first message is being played.  
By utilizing the digital recording capability of the  
VGS-1, you can configure the VGS-1 to store the last  
30-second of the incoming reception signal to the  
VGS-1. It is similar to a flight recorder that is used in  
an aircraft. You can play back the last 30 seconds of  
the reception signal to confirm what has been heard.  
Up to 3 channels can be queued.  
To activate the Constant Recording function, access  
Menu No. 30 and select “on”. “ ” appears and the  
the transceiver starts recording the signal in  
background. When you press [CH3/ 3/ REC] (1 s),  
the VGS-1 stores a maximum of last 30-second of the  
reception audio signal to the flash memory. While  
writing the audio signal data to flash memory, “FLASH  
WR” appears for a while. To playback the stored  
reception signal, press [CH3/ 3/ REC].  
Sending Messages  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.  
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
2 Press [VOX/ 8] to switch VOX ON or OFF.  
If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.  
To play back the stored reception sound, press  
[CH3/ 3/ REC]. To quit, press [MTR/ CLR].  
3 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
Note:  
4 Press [CH1/ 1/ REC], [CH2/ 2/ REC], or  
[CH3/ 3/ REC], depending on which channel  
you want to use.  
While the Menu No. 30 is ON, you cannot use the Channel 3  
(CH3) message memory to record and playback your voice  
message. However, the message in CH3 is not erased. When  
the Constant Recording function is turned OFF (Menu No.30 is  
OFF), you can playback the message on Channel 3 (CH3).  
For example, “AP 1– –” appear while playing  
back the message in channel 1.  
While the “ ” icon disappears, such as the VGS-1 is playing  
back a message or the Voice Guide function is working, the  
Constant Recording function temporarily pauses.  
When you record a new message to the VGS-1, 30-second  
Constant Recording buffer is cleared.  
You cannot transmit a stored audio signal that is recorded with  
the Constant Recording function.  
To interrupt playback, press [MTR/ CLR].  
69  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
VOICE GUIDE  
2
The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the number  
shown below.  
When the optional VGS-1 is installed, each time you  
change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/ B or  
Memory Recall, the transceiver automatically  
announces the new mode. In addition, you can  
program the Remote Control panel [PF] key so that  
pressing it makes the transceiver announce the  
displayed information. If you have the optional  
MC-47 microphone with MJ-88 plug adaptor, you  
can program one of the Mic [PF] keys for this  
function as well.  
Menu number 61 VOICE1 62 VOICE2 63 RX MONI  
DSP RX  
MONI  
FREQ.  
LOCK  
64  
65  
66 SEND (PTT) 67 TX TUNE  
68 USB LSB 69 CW FSK 70 FM AM 71 TF-SET  
72  
76  
80  
84  
88  
92  
QMR  
M/V  
M.IN  
CH3  
MHz  
BC  
73  
77  
81  
85  
QMI  
A=B  
CW.T  
FINE  
74  
78  
82  
86  
SPLIT  
SCAN  
CH1  
CLR.  
NB  
75  
79  
83  
87  
91  
A/B  
M>V  
CH2  
MTR  
NR  
89 ANT1/2 90  
93 DNL 99  
OFF  
The table below indicates what the transceiver  
For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce  
different information, depending on whether VOICE1  
or VOICE2 is selected.  
automatically announces when it changes the settings.  
Key Pressed  
Operation  
Announcement  
VOICE1:  
“S”1 + A/B +  
Frequency  
The frequency on display, channel number,  
various mode settings, and Menu settings are  
announced.  
VFO A  
VFO B  
[A/B]  
[ ], [ ]  
Band change  
Frequency  
The frequency for the VFO or memory channel will  
be announced to 10 Hz digit. For the MHz  
decimal point, “point” is announced. If the  
memory channel has no data stored, “blank” is  
announced.  
VFO + “S”1+ A/B +  
Frequency  
VFO or  
Memory  
Recall  
[A/B / M/V]  
(1 s)  
or  
Channel + Memory  
No. + Frequency or  
“blank”  
If a memory channel that has no data is selected  
in Memory Scroll mode, “blank” is announced.  
Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the  
display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement is  
interrupted.  
Menu + No. +  
Selected number +  
Parameter  
[MENU/  
F.LOCK]  
Menu No.  
selection  
VOICE2:  
Menu  
Parameter  
change  
[ ], [ ]  
Selected parameter  
The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the  
key, are announced, for example, “S5” or “20 dB”.  
Memory in +  
Memory No. +  
Frequency  
The table below shows the available announcements  
[QMI/ M.IN]  
(1 s)  
Memory  
Scroll mode  
when the [PF] (VOICE2) is pressed.  
S-Meter  
Level  
Announce-  
ment  
S-Meter  
Level  
Announce-  
ment  
Frequency  
entry  
[ENT]  
Enter  
0
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
10  
11  
S8  
No. + Selected  
number +  
Parameter  
Menu No.  
changes  
1 ~ 3  
S9  
4
5
6
7
8
9
12  
10 dB  
20 dB  
30 dB  
40 dB  
50 dB  
60 dB  
Memory  
channel No.  
changes  
13 ~ 14  
15  
MULTI  
control  
Memory channel  
No. + Frequency  
16 ~ 17  
18  
Settings for  
various  
functions  
Parameter value  
19 ~ 20  
Numeric key  
Entering  
numbers  
Every number  
entered  
1 Assign VOICE1 (61) or VOICE2 (62) to the  
Remote Control panel [PF] key by accessing  
Menu No. 48. Or, if you are using the optional  
MC-47 microphone, assign one of the Mic [PF]  
keys to either VOICE1 or VOICE2. For  
programming Mic [PF] keys, refer to  
entry  
Selecting a  
function  
Function name +  
Parameter  
Function key  
Freq. Lock  
function  
Frequency  
lock status  
Frequency lock ON/  
OFF  
“MICROPHONE PF KEYS” {page 64}.  
Quick memory +  
Memory number +  
“S”1+ A/B +  
Quick  
Memory  
recall  
2 Press the [PF] key that you programmed.  
Recall Quick  
Memory  
An announcement is made based on the  
VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection.  
Frequency  
To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]  
key again.  
1
“S” is anounced when the transceiver is operating in Split-  
frequency mode.  
70  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
CROSSBAND REPTEATER  
Voice Guide Announcement Volume  
Turning the AF control does not change the volume  
for the Voice Guide announcement volume. To  
change the announcement volume , access Menu  
No. 15 to select the volume level from “1” to “7” or  
“oFF”.  
If you have a TM-D700 transceiver and another VHF  
or UHF transceiver, you can set up the TS-480  
transceiver and TM-D700 transceiver as a crossband  
repeater. The TM-D700 will receive signals you  
transmit from the additional VHF or UHF transceiver  
when both transceivers are set with the same  
frequency. The signal is then routed to the TS-480  
transceiver and retransmitted on the frequency you  
have set upon the TS-480 transceiver. Likewise,  
signals received on the TS-480 transceiver are routed  
to the TM-D700 and retransmitted to the transceiver  
you have with you, allowing you to hear the received  
call in a distant location.  
Voice Guide Announcement Speed  
If you feel the Voice Announcement speed is too slow  
or fast, you can adjust the Voice Announcement  
speed. Five different speed can be configured.  
Access Menu No. 16 and select “0” to “4”. 0 is the  
slowest speed and 4 is the fastest speed. The default  
speed is 1.  
To interface between the TS-480 transceiver and  
TM-D700 transceiver, refer to “CROSSBAND  
REPEATER” for details {page 79}.  
You need a cable that has mini-DIN (6-pin) male  
connector at both ends.  
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels of both  
transceivers (TS-480 and TM-D700) must be adjusted properly so  
that no background noise can be heard. Because the transmission is  
controlled by monitoring the squelch status only.  
Operation  
The crossband repeater function uses 2 frequency  
bands to receive and transmit signals. When a signal  
is received on one band, it is retransmitted on the  
other band.  
1 Select a desired transmission/ reception VHF or  
UHF frequency on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
2 Confirm PTT icon is visible on the crossband  
repeater frequency on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
3 Select the same frequency for the terminal  
transceiver.  
4 Select a desired HF/ 50 MHz frequency on the  
TS-480 transceiver.  
5 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both  
TS-480 transceiver and TM-D700 transceiver  
mute.  
6 Press [MENU/ F. LOCK] on the TS-480, then turn  
MULTI control to access Menu No. 57.  
7 Press [ ] to select “on”.  
When the TS-480 transceiver’s squelch opens,  
the TM-D700 transceiver retransmits the  
incoming audio signal on the VHF or UHF  
frequency at the same time.  
When the TM-D700 transceiver’s squelch  
opens, the TS-480 transceiver retransmits the  
incoming audio signal on the HF/ 50 MHz  
frequency.  
8 Access Menu Nos. 46 and 47 and press [ ]/ [  
]
to adjust the input/ output audio level.  
9 To quit the TM-D700 repeater operation,  
disconnect the interface cable between  
transceivers and access Menu No. 57 on the  
TS-480 transceiver and select “oFF”.  
71  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE  
If you have the TM-D700 transceiver, you can  
connect the TM-D700 to the TS-480HX/ SAT  
transceiver to use the DX PacketCluster Tune  
function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a cross-  
wired DB-9 cable as shown on page 79.  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn MULTI control to  
select Menu No. 56 on the TS-480 transceiver.  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select the same communication  
baud rate that the TM-D700 transceiver is  
configured.  
3 Tune to the DX PacketCluster node frequency on  
the TM-D700 transceiver.  
4 Press [F] (1 s), [TNC] on the TM-D700  
transceiver.  
“TNC APRS” appears on the TM-D700 display.  
5 Press [F] (1 s), [DX] on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
Every time the DX station’s information is  
reported to the DX PacketCluster node, the  
TM-D700 stores and list the report to the  
memory.  
6 Select a desired DX station data with [c]/ [d] on  
the TM-D700 transceiver.  
7 Press [MHz] on the TM-D700 to transfer the  
frequency data to the TS-480 transceiver.  
If the transferred frequency data is available on  
the TS-480 transceiver, the frequency data will  
be overwritten to the current operating  
frequency. Otherwise, the operating frequency  
of the TS-480 transceiver remains unchanged.  
For more detailed operation on the DX PacketCluster  
operation of the TM-D700 transceiver, refer to page 6  
of the TM-D700 instruction manual (Specialized  
Communications).  
Note: The firmware of the TM-D700 transceiver must be version  
G2.0 or later to use the DX PacketCluster Tune function.  
72  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
Starting Sky Command II operation:  
SKY COMMAND II (K-TYPE ONLY)  
After you have completed the following setups, you  
can start Sky Command II operation. Without  
programming these parameters, you cannot perform  
Sky Command II operation.  
The Sky Command II allows you to remotely control  
the TS-480HX/ SAT transceiver from a separate  
location.  
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/ or TM-D700A  
transceivers, you can perform Sky Command II  
operation to remotely control the HF/ 50 MHz band of  
your TS-480 transceiver.  
TS-480 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:  
1 Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a  
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary  
cables to the TS-480 transceiver.  
You will use one transceiver (TH-D7A or TM-D700A)  
as a remote control unit, called a “Commander”. The  
other VHF/ UHF transceiver (TH-D7A or TM-D700A)  
with the TS-480 transceiver is called the  
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the  
TS-480 transceiver.  
“Transporter”. This TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceier  
will function as an interface between the Commander  
(a remote control unit) and the HF/ 50 MHz band of  
the TS-480 transceiver.  
3 On the TS-480, press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn  
the MULTI control to access Menu No. 56, then  
select the desired communication speed.  
4 Select the same communication parameters to  
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and  
hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF  
transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or  
patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.  
match the TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver.  
5 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to complete.  
6 Configure and start the Transporter mode on the  
TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver.  
On the TM-D700A (Commander):  
1 Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that  
you selected for the Transporter.  
2 Access Menu 4–4 to select COMMANDER.  
“PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!”  
appears.  
3 Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to  
start the Sky Command II operation.  
CONTROL OPERATION  
After setting up both the Transporter and the  
TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command II  
operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in  
Sky Command II mode, the Mic keys of the  
Commander will function as described below.  
SKY COMMAND II DIAGRAM  
VHF freq.  
Audio  
Audio  
UHF freq.  
Control commands  
Audios  
Control commands  
tResponse  
tResponse  
Each time you press a key, the Commander will  
automatically enter Transmission mode and send the  
corresponding control command to the Transporter.  
Commander  
Transporter  
To switch the HF  
transceiver OFF  
To change the frequency Press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
or memory channel on  
the HF transceiver  
Press Mic [1].  
PREPARATION  
Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A  
transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote  
control unit), the following procedure shows how to  
set up your TS-480 and TH-D7A or TM-D700A  
transceivers as a “Transporter” at a base station and  
the TM-D700A transceiver as a “Commander”.  
To transmit audio on an Press and hold Mic  
HF frequency  
[PTT], then speak into the  
microphone.  
Press Mic [2].  
To receive audio on an  
HF frequency  
To monitor the UHF band Press the Mic PF key  
on the Commander  
assigned to the Monitor  
function.  
73  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
TS-480 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:  
Mic Key  
Function  
1 Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a  
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary  
cables to the TS-480 transceiver.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Power OFF  
HF frequency receive ON/ OFF  
Modulation mode switch  
RIT ON/ OFF  
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the  
TS-480 transceiver.  
3 On the TS-480, press [MENU/ F.LOCK], then turn  
XIT ON/ OFF  
the MULTI control to access Menu No. 56.  
RIT offset or XIT offset clear  
Split-frequency ON/ OFF  
Transfer from Memory to VFO  
4 Select the same communication parameters that  
you selected for the TH-D7A or TM-D700A  
transceiver.  
5 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] to complete.  
In VFO mode: VFO A/ VFO B switch  
In Memory Recall mode: No change  
Current settings retrieve  
(from HF transceiver)  
9
0
6 Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or  
TM-D700A transceiver.  
TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:  
B
C
D
VFO/ Memory Recall mode switch  
XIT/ RIT offset frequency increase  
XIT/ RIT offset frequency decrease  
1 Access Menu 4–1 to enter the same callsign that  
you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).  
2 Access Menu 4–2 to enter the same callsign that  
you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).  
In LSB, USB, or CW mode:  
10 Hz/ 1 kHz switch  
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/ 10 kHz switch  
In VFO mode: Frequency entry ON  
In Memory Recall mode: Channel number  
entry ON  
1
3 Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone  
frequency that you selected for the Transporter.  
2
4 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the  
#
“Transporter” for the VHF and UHF bands.  
1 “FS” appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/ USB/ CW) or 10 kHz  
step (FM/ AM).  
Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A  
instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS  
tone frequency.  
2 After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a frequency or  
memory channel number.  
When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the  
current settings of the HF transceiver:  
CONTROL OPERATION  
First, switch the TS-480 and TH-D7A or TM-D700A  
transceivers (Transporter) ON. Configure the  
TH-D7A or TM-D700A to enter the “Transporter”  
mode.  
w
q
u
Then, access Menu 4–4 on the TH-D7A and select  
“COMMANDER”. “PUSH [0] KEY TO START  
COMMANDER!!” appears.  
e
r
t
y
Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command II  
mode.  
q HF frequency  
w VFO: A, VFO: B,  
When in Sky Command II mode, the keys of the  
TH-D7A (Commander) will function as described  
below. Only [LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control  
functions will not change.  
MR: 00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)  
e RIT, XIT  
r OFF, 9.99 ~ +9.99  
t LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM  
y SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.  
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.  
SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.  
u “FS” appears when Mic [ ] is pressed.  
Note:  
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.  
The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every  
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.  
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the  
Transporter is ON.  
Each time you press the desired key, the Commander  
will automatically enter Transmission mode and send  
the corresponding control command to the  
Transporter.  
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER  
To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a “Commander” (an  
external remote control unit), follow the steps below.  
Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a  
“Commander” (described on the previous page).  
74  
13 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
Note:  
To switch the HF  
transceiver OFF  
On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will  
function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the  
Transporter to generate an error beep.  
Press [POWER].  
Press and hold the PTT  
switch, then speak into  
the microphone.  
To transmit audio on an  
HF frequency  
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.  
The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every  
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.  
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the  
Transporter is ON.  
To receive audio on an  
HF frequency  
Press [RX].  
To monitor the UHF band  
on the Commander  
Press and hold [MONI].  
Key  
Function  
Tuning Frequency or memory channel number  
control change  
UP/  
DWN  
RIT offset or XIT offset change  
In VFO mode: VFO A/ VFO B switch  
A/B  
In Memory Recall mode: No change  
POWER 1 Power ON/ OFF  
RX 1  
MODE 1 Modulation mode switch  
HF frequency receive ON/ OFF  
RIT 1  
XIT 1  
RIT ON/ OFF  
XIT ON/ OFF  
CLR 1 RIT offset or XIT offset clear  
SPLIT 1 Split-frequency ON/ OFF  
MsV 1 Transfer from Memory to VFO  
In LSB, USB, or CW mode:  
FAST 10 Hz/ 1 kHz switch  
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/ 10 kHz switch  
Current settings retrieve  
SYNC 1  
(from HF transceiver)  
In VFO mode: Frequency entry ON  
In Memory Recall mode: Channel  
number entry ON  
ENT  
M/V  
VFO/ Memory Recall mode switch  
1 After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys to  
enter a frequency or memory channel number.  
When [0/ SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows  
the current settings of the TS-480 transceiver:  
w
t
q
e
y
r
u
q HF frequency  
w A (VFO A), B (VFO B),  
00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)  
e RIT, XIT  
r OFF, 9.99 ~ +9.99  
t “FS” appears when [FAST] is ON.  
y LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM  
u SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.  
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.  
SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.  
75  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
COMPUTER  
The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using a straight-wired cable,  
having a DB-9 female connector at each end.  
No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver.  
To COM port  
EXT  
.SP  
D
ATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
P
ANEL  
OM  
P
ADELE  
KEY  
PC  
Straight-wired  
Cable  
To COM connector  
(DB-9 female)  
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER  
When transferring data to or from another TS-480, TS-2000, TS-570, or TS-870S, directly connect the  
2 transceivers using the COM connectors.  
DB-9 connector wiring  
(Cross-wired)  
TS-480/ TS-2000  
/ 870S/ 570  
TS-480HX/ SAT  
EXT  
.SP  
DATA  
RE  
MO  
TE  
MIC  
PANEL  
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
DB-9 female DB-9 female  
Cross-wired cable  
76  
14 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
RTTY OPERATION  
Use the REMOTE and DATA connectors to interface with your MCP. If your MCP supports RTTY keying output,  
connect the output to pin 8 of the REMOTE connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the MCP to  
pin 5 of the DATA connector {page 78}. Also, connect the transmission control line of the MCP to pin 3 of the  
REMOTE terminal. Select “FSK” or ”FSR” when you operate the RTTY mode.  
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the  
transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.  
MCP  
Power supply  
EXT  
.SP  
D
ATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
PA  
N
E
L
Mini-DIN (6-pin)  
COM  
P
ADELE  
KEY  
Mini-DIN (8-pin)  
MCP  
Power supply  
for the TS-480  
HF/ 50 MHz LINEAR AMPLIFIER  
Connect an external transmission power amplifier to the REMOTE connector (1 male, 8-pin mini DIN connector  
(E57-0405-XX) is supplied). Switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu Nos. 28 (HF) and 29 (50 MHz).  
Select “2” or “3” if you use the internal relay to control the linear amplifier status.  
The TX/ RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have  
selected CW Semi Break-in.  
Note:  
The TX/ RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is  
grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the  
connector to the control terminal of the amplifier.  
The mini DIN connectors (DATA and REMOTE connectors) look alike. Confirm the number of pins before plugging into the transceiver  
connectors. The REMOTE connector is an 8-pin mini DIN connector and the DATA connector is a 6-pin mini DIN connector.  
REMOTE terminal pin assignment (8-pin mini DIN)  
Linear Amp.  
Pin  
Name  
Pin No.  
Function  
TS-480HX/ SAT  
1
2
SPO Speaker output  
COM Common terminal of the relay  
Ground this terminal to transmit.  
EX  
T.S  
P
DA  
TA  
RE  
MO  
TE  
MIC  
PANEL  
CO  
M
P
ADELE  
KEY  
3
4
SS  
ANI (DATA connector) terminal  
turns OFF.  
To antenna  
Connects to COM (pin 2) when  
the transceiver transmits.  
Use the supplied  
MKE  
BRK  
mini DIN (8-pin) connector to  
interface with the Linear Amp.  
Connects to COM (pin 2) when  
the transceiver receives.  
Internal relay  
for the Linear amplifier.  
r
5
6
ALC ALC input from amplifier (–7 V)  
Approx. +12 V DC is output when  
RL  
w
t
u
7
8
the transceiver transmits  
(10 mA max.).  
GND  
i
y
RTTY (FSK) keying input.  
t
e
RTK Ground this terminal to alternate  
Mark and Space.  
w
q
r
REMOTE connector  
Metal  
cover  
Ground  
(Front view)  
77  
14 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
ANTENNA TUNER  
Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an AT-300 external antenna tuner. If you connect the external  
antenna tuner to the ANT 2 connector, it will not function.  
Note: When the AT-300 is used with the TS-480HX transceiver, the TX output power is automatically reduced to 100 W (AM mode: 25 W).  
Also, the AT-300 cannot be used for 50 MHz operation.  
AT  
1
2
DC  
2
13.8V  
1
ND  
DC  
13.8V  
ANT 1 connector  
MCP AND TNC  
Use the DATA connector to connect the AF input/ output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet  
operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on AFSK, Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR,  
G-TORTM, PSK31, or FAX, or a Clover interface. Also use the DATA connector to connect SSTV and phone patch  
equipment (1 male, 6-pin mini DIN connector (E57-0404-XX) is supplied).  
Connect the TNC or MCP to the DATA connector using a cable equipped with a 6-pin mini DIN plug.  
Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.  
Select LSB or USB mode (it depends on the communication mode) when you operate the MCP/ TNC.  
Note:  
Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the  
transceiver and the computer to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.  
The mini DIN connectors (REMOTE and DATA connectors) look alike. Confirm the number of pins before plugging into the transceiver  
connectors. The DATA connector is a 6-pin mini DIN connector and the REMOTE connector is an 8-pin mini DIN connector.  
Power Supply  
for MCP/ TNC  
EXT  
.SP  
DA  
TA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
P
ANEL  
Mini DIN male  
(6-pin)  
COM  
P
ADELE  
KEY  
MCP/ TNC  
DC Power Supply  
for the transceiver  
DATA connector pin assignment (6-pin mini DIN)  
Pin  
Pin No.  
Function  
Name  
1
2
ANI  
Audio input from MCP/ TNC  
DATA  
t
e
q
y
r
w
ANG Audio signal ground  
Ground this terminal to transmit.  
DTS When it is grounded, the  
microphone input turns OFF.  
3
DATA connector  
(Front view)  
4
5
NC  
No connection  
ANO Audio output for MCP/ TNC  
Squelch status  
6
SQC • Squelch open: Low impedance  
• Squelch close: High impedance  
Metal  
cover  
GND Ground  
78  
14 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE  
If you have a TM-D700 transceiver, you can connect the TM-D700 to the TS-480 transceiver to use the DX  
PacketCluster Tune function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a cross-wired RS-232C cable as shown below.  
Configure the TM-D700 transceiver to the DX PacketCluster node frequency.  
TS-480 transceiver  
TM-D700 transceiver  
EX  
T.  
SP  
DAT  
A
RE  
M
O
TE  
M
IC  
PAN  
EL  
CO  
M
COM  
D
ATA  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
GPS  
P
ANEL  
MIC  
RESET  
Cross-wired cable  
1 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] and turn the MULTI control to select Menu No. 56 on the TS-480 transceiver.  
2 Press [ ]/ [ ] to select the same communication baud rate configured on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
3 Tune to the DX PacketCluster node frequency on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
4 Press [F] (1 s), [TNC] on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
“TNC APRS” appears on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
5 Press [F] (1 s), [DX] on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
6 Select a desired DX station data with [c]/ [d] on the TM-D700 transceiver.  
7 Press [MHz] on the TM-D700 transceiver to transfer the frequency data to the TS-480 transceiver.  
If the transferred frequency data is available on the TS-480 transceiver, the frequency data will be  
overwritten to the current operating frequency. Otherwise, the operating frequency of the TS-480  
transceiver remains unchanged.  
For more detailed operation on the DX PacketCluster operation of the TM-D700 transceiver, refer to page 6 of the  
TM-D700 instruction manual (Specialized Communications).  
Note: The firmware of the TM-D700 transceiver must be version G2.0 or later to use the DX PacketCluster Tune function.  
CROSSBAND REPEATER  
If you have a TM-D700 transceiver, you can connect the TM-D700 transceiver to the TS-480 transceiver to use  
the Crossband repeater function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a mini DIN cable (6-pin) as shown below.  
TS-480 transceiver  
TM-D700 transceiver  
EX  
T.  
SP  
DATA  
RE  
M
O
TE  
MIC  
PA  
N
E
L
CO  
M
COM  
D
ATA  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
GPS  
P
ANEL  
MIC  
RESET  
To DATA connector  
To DATA connector  
After connecting the 2 transceivers with the cable, access Menu No. 57 (DTS polarity) on the TS-480 transceiver  
and select “on”. You will further need to adjust the audio input/ output level of the TS-480 transceiver using Menu  
Nos. 46 and 47.  
TS-480  
TM-D700  
t
y
ANI  
PKD  
DE  
PKS  
PR9  
PR1  
SQC  
q
w
e
r
t
y
q
w
e
r
t
y
ANG  
DTS  
NC  
ANO  
SQC  
e
r
q
w
Mini DIN  
Mini DIN  
Mini DIN  
6-pin male  
6-pin male  
6-pin male  
79  
14 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
SKY COMMAND II (K-TYPE ONLY)  
TM-D700A  
TM-D700A  
transceiver  
TS-480  
transceiver  
In order to connect the TS-480 transceiver to the  
TM-D700A transceiver, you need to prepare  
3 cables by yourself. For the connection between  
the COM connectors on the 2 transceivers, you  
may use a commercially available RS-232C cross-  
wired cable.  
COM  
connector  
COM  
connector  
Note:  
Switch OFF both the TM-D700 and TS-480 transceiver before  
making the connection.  
UP  
The TM-D700A transceiver automatically transmits its call sign  
in Morse code at regular intervals because of legal  
requirements; therefore, transmit sidetone must be output  
from the TS-480 transceiver.  
8 V DC  
GND  
3.5 mm (1/8 ")  
speaker jack  
STBY (MIC)  
GND (MIC)  
MIC  
When the TM-D700A transceiver is too close to the TS-480  
transceiver, unwanted feedback may cause malfunction.  
RJ-45  
MIC jack  
NC  
Do not share a regulated power supply between the  
TM-D700A transceiver and the TS-480 transceiver. Unwanted  
feedback may cause malfunction.  
DWN  
UP  
8 V DC  
GND  
STBY (MIC)  
GND (MIC)  
MIC  
RJ-45  
MIC jack  
3.5 mm (1/8 ")  
speaker jack  
NC  
DWN  
80  
INSTALLING OPTIONS  
You will require a #1 Philips screwdriver to install the  
VGS-1. To install the YF-107 IF filter(s) and/ or SO-3  
TCXO, you will also need a soldering iron (approx.  
30 watts).  
VGS-1 connector  
VGS-1  
N
I O  
P T  
O
X O 
T
OPTION FIL  
TER1  
OPION FIL  
TE  
R2  
EX  
T.  
SP  
D
ATA  
RE  
M
OTE  
M
IC  
PA  
NEL  
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
REMOVING THE TOP COVER  
When installing the optional VGS-1, YF-107 IF filters  
or SO-3 TCXO, remove the top cover of the  
transceiver:  
5 Replace the shield cover and tighten the 4 screws.  
6 Replace the top case (8 screws).  
1 Remove the 8 screws.  
Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VGS-1 playback  
volume by selecting Menu Nos. 14 and 15.  
YF-107C/ CN/ SN IF FILTERS AND SO-3 TCXO  
OPTION FIL  
TER1  
SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER  
CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.  
OTION FIL  
TER2  
EX  
T.SP  
DATA  
REMO  
TE  
MIC  
PA  
NE  
L
CO  
M
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
Three different types of IF filters (YF-107C,  
YF-107CN, and YF-107SN) are available for the  
TS-480 transceiver. You can install a maximum of 2  
IF filters in the transceiver. Refer to page 90 for the  
bandwidth information on each filter. As for the SO-3  
option improves the transceiver frequency stability to  
±0.5 ppm.  
2 Lift off the top cover.  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT  
1 Remove the top case (8 screws).  
SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER  
CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.  
2 Locate the filter and TCXO PCB and loosen the  
3 screws.  
1 Remove the top case (8 screws) {above}.  
IF filter/ TCXO PCB  
2 Loosen the 4 screws to remove the shield cover.  
N
I O T P  
X C  
T
O
O
OPTION IL  
VGS-1 connector  
TER1  
OPTION FIL  
TER2  
EXT  
.SP  
DATA  
REMOTE  
M
IC  
PA  
NE  
L
COM  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
N O  
X C  
I
T P  
O
O
OPTION FIL  
TER1  
OPTION FIL  
TER2  
EXT  
.SP  
3 Unlatch the connectors by pressing the connector  
DATA  
REMOTE  
M
IC  
PA  
NEL  
tabs upwards.  
COM  
PA  
DDLE  
KEY  
N
I O  
P T  
O
X
C  
O
PTION FIL  
TER1  
3 There are 5 rubber cushions in the VGS-1  
package. Use the 2 rubber cushions shown below  
and attach them to the VGS-1. The remaining  
cushions are not used.  
OPTION FIL  
TER2  
N O  
X C  
I
T P  
O
O
OPTION FIL  
TER1  
OPTION FIL  
TER2  
EXT  
.SP  
DATA  
REMOTE  
M
IC  
PA  
NE  
L
COM  
PA  
D
DLE  
KEY  
4 Insert the IF filter(s) and/ or SO-3 TCXO.  
Calibration hole  
SO-3  
Secondary IF filter  
Primary IF filter  
4 Plug the VGS-1 into the VGS-1 connector of the  
PC board, pressing down on the top of the VGS-1  
until secure.  
I O  
P T  
O
X
C  
PTION FIL  
TER1  
OPTION FIL  
TER2  
81  
15 INSTALLING OPTIONS  
SO-3: The calibration hole must be on the right  
side, looking from the front panel.  
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION  
Note: The transceiver is adjusted at the factory prior to shipping.  
Unless necessary, DO NOT perform this adjustment.  
IF filters: Insert a primary IF filter in the OPTION  
FILTER1 location, and a secondary IF filter in the  
OPTION FILTER2 location. The transceiver  
automatically detects what optional IF filter(s) is  
installed when it is turned ON.  
1 Set the following on the transceiver:  
Mode: CW  
AF control: Center  
5 Solder all pins on the reverse side of the PCB.  
Menu No. 34 (CW RX pitch): 800 Hz  
IF SHIFT control: Center  
RIT function: OFF  
SO-3: Cut the 2 wires marked as R103 and R104,  
as shown below.  
R104  
R103  
Break-in function (VOX): OFF  
2 Remove the top case (8 screws) from the  
X1  
transceiver.  
3 Tune in a standard frequency station such as  
WWV or WWVH at, for example, 10.000.00 or  
15.000.00 MHz.  
EXT  
.SP  
D
ATA  
REMOTE  
MIC  
P
ANEL  
COM  
Adjust the Tuning control so that the display  
P
ADDLE  
KEY  
reads the exact frequency of the station.  
You should hear a beat tone of approximately  
800 Hz.  
6 Replace the PCB in the transceiver and press  
both the tabs downwards until secure.  
For 800 Hz:  
7 Tighten the 3 screws and replace the top cover.  
faf = (fdisplay/15.600 x freference) + 800 Hz  
where freference is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
reference frequency.  
4 Close your CW key. You will hear a transmit  
sidetone of approximately 800 Hz.  
This sidetone produces a double beat tone  
when it combines with the received signal.  
Adjust the AF control to hear the double beat  
clearly.  
For 800 Hz:  
fsidetone = 800 Hz ±50 ppm (= 800 ±0.04 Hz)  
where freference is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
reference frequency.  
5 TS-480 transceiver without SO-3:  
Adjust the trimmer (TC1) to minimize the  
frequency difference between the received 800 Hz  
tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
TS-480 transceiver with SO-3:  
Adjust the trimmer inside the SO-3 using the  
supplied plastic adjustment tool (W01-0406-XX).  
Minimize the frequency difference between the  
received 800 Hz tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
6 Replace the top cover (8 screws).  
82  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Note:  
Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer from  
whom the transceiver was purchased.  
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested  
to specification before shipment. Under normal  
circumstances, the transceiver will operate in  
accordance with these operating instructions. All  
adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the  
transceiver were preset at the factory. They should  
only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is  
familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary  
test equipment. Attempting service or alignment  
without factory authorization can void the transceiver  
warranty.  
For your own information, retain a written record of any  
maintenance performed on the transceiver.  
When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy of  
the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date of  
sale.  
CLEANING  
The keys, controls and case of the transceiver are  
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove  
the controls from the transceiver and clean them with  
a neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral  
detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to  
clean the case.  
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide  
years of service and enjoyment without requiring  
further realignment. The information in this section  
gives some general service procedures requiring little  
or no test equipment.  
BACKUP BATTERY  
This transceiver uses an EEPROM (a.k.a. Flash  
ROM) to store memory channel data, menu  
configurations and all necessary operation  
parameters. So, you never have to worry about  
replacing batteries to operate the transceiver.  
SERVICE  
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your  
dealer or service center for repair, pack the  
transceiver in its original box and packing material.  
Include a full description of the problems  
experienced. Include both your telephone number  
and fax number (if available) along with your name  
and address in case the service technician needs to  
call for further explanation while investigating your  
problem. Don’t return accessory items unless you  
feel they are directly related to the service problem.  
You may return your transceiver for service to the  
authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you  
purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service  
center. A copy of the service report will be returned  
with the transceiver. Please do not send  
subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send the  
complete transceiver.  
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign  
for identification. Please mention the model and  
serial number of the transceiver in any  
communication regarding the problem.  
SERVICE NOTE  
If you desire to correspond on a technical or  
operational problem, please make your note short,  
complete, and to the point. Help us help you by  
providing the following:  
1 Model and serial number of equipment  
2 Question or problem you are having  
3 Other equipment in your station pertaining to the  
problem  
4 Meter readings  
5 Other related information (Menu setup, mode,  
frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,  
etc.)  
DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED  
NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY  
RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.  
83  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of  
difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to  
incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table, and  
the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual, before assuming your transceiver is defective.  
Note: Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver.  
Page  
Ref.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
The transceiver will not 1 DC power supply is OFF.  
1 Switch ON the DC power supply.  
2 Inspect the power cable. Confirm  
polarities are correct.  
18  
2, 3  
power up after  
2 Faulty power cable  
connecting a 13.8 V DC  
power supply and  
Red: positive (+); Black: negative (–)  
pressing [ ]. Nothing 3 The power cable is not connected 3 Confirm the connections to the DC  
2, 3  
5
appears on the display,  
securely.  
power supply are secure.  
4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse.  
After inspecting and correcting any  
problems, install a new fuse of the  
specified rating.  
and no receiver noise is 4 Power cable fuse is open.  
heard.  
After switching ON the 1 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V 1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to 2, 3  
power, the transceiver  
does not function  
normally. For example,  
no digits or incorrect  
digits appear on the  
display.  
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).  
2 The microprocessor has  
malfunctioned.  
16 V battery.  
2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR  
RESET”. After understanding what  
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset. If  
the problem remains, do a Full Reset.  
88  
After switching ON the 1 The current rating of the DC  
1 Use the DC power supply that has  
20.5 A or more current rating.  
2 Connect 2 DC power supplies to the  
TS-480HX transceiver. The voltage  
difference between 2 DC power  
3
3
transceiver, the  
transceiver refuses to  
transmit.  
power supply is too low.  
2 Two same DC power supplies  
(20.5 A or more each) or a DC  
power supply that has 41 A more  
current capacity.  
supplies must be within 1.0 V to  
transmit. Also, confirm each DC power  
supply has a 20.5 A or higher current  
rating. If a DC power supply that has  
41 A more current capacity, two same  
type of DC cables must be used.  
The transceiver does  
not respond correctly  
after pressing key  
1 Procedures are not being  
followed precisely.  
2 The Frequency Lock function is  
ON.  
1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS  
FOLLOWED”.  
2 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] (1 s) to switch 63  
ii  
combinations or turning  
the function OFF.  
controls per instructions 3 The microprocessor and its  
3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR  
RESET”. After understanding what  
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset. If  
the problem remains, do a Full Reset.  
88  
63  
in this manual.  
memory need resetting.  
The frequency cannot  
be changed.  
The Frequency Lock function or  
Lock All function is ON.  
Press [MENU/ F.LOCK] (1 s) to turn the  
Frequency Lock function OFF. The “ ”  
icon disappears.  
SSB audio quality is  
very poor; the high or  
low audio frequencies  
are absent.  
1 The wrong operation mode is  
selected for the receiver.  
2 The AF DSP filter is incorrectly  
set.  
1 Select USB or LSB for the mode.  
19  
46  
47  
2 Press [FIL/ NAR] then turn the MULTI  
control to adjust the DSP filter width.  
3 Press [NR] until the NR function turns  
OFF.  
3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is ON.  
4 Beat Cancel 1 or 2 is ON.  
4 Press [BC/ CW.T] until the BC function 47  
turns OFF.  
84  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Page  
Ref.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
No signals are  
1 The SQL control is fully clockwise.  
1 Turn the SQL control counterclockwise. 19  
received or receive 2 The Attenuator function is ON.  
sensitivity seems  
2 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] until “ATT”  
and “PRE” disappear.  
61  
poor.  
3 Mic [PTT] is pressed.  
4 The IF filter bandwidth was  
incorrectly set.  
3 Release Mic [PTT].  
4 Review “DSP FILTERS”, “CHANGING  
20  
45,  
THE IF FILTER BANDWIDTH” and set 46  
the controls accordingly.  
5 The wrong antenna connector  
(ANT 1 or ANT 2) was selected.  
6 The preamplifier is OFF.  
5 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] (1 s) to  
select the other antenna connector.  
6 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] to switch  
the function ON.  
60  
49  
18  
No signals are  
The RF gain was set too low.  
Press [MIC/ 5/ RF.G] (1 s) and turn the  
MULTI control clockwise to increase the  
RF gain.  
received or receive  
sensitivity seems  
poor; S-meter is  
reading full scale.  
Received signals  
are totally  
The wrong modulation mode was  
selected.  
Press [MODE] or [MODE] (1 s) to select  
the correct modulation mode.  
19  
unintelligible.  
Memory Scan will  
not start scanning.  
1 The SQL control was not set  
1 Adjust the SQL control to just eliminate 19  
correctly.  
background noise.  
2 Less than 2 memory channels were 2 Unlock at least 2 memory channels.  
unlocked.  
3 Less than 2 memory channels were 3 Store data in at least 2 memory  
54  
50  
programmed.  
channels.  
Memory Scan will  
With Group Scan selected, the channel Select the Memory Group that contains  
59  
not scan one of the you want to scan is in a different group. the memory channel you want to scan.  
stored channels; the  
desired channel is  
NOT locked out.  
Program Scan will  
not start scanning.  
The start and end frequencies are  
identical.  
Store different start and end frequencies.  
53  
60  
AT does not finish  
successfully  
The impedance of the coaxial cable and Adjust the antenna system to lower the  
antenna was not matched.  
SWR.  
(TS-480SAT or  
TS-480HX with  
AT-300).  
Tuning does not successfully finish  
depending on conditions although the  
SWR meter indicates smaller than 3:1.  
The internal tuner is The SWR of the antenna system is too Adjust the antenna system to lower the  
60  
6
bypassed  
high.  
SWR.  
immediately after  
tuning is started.  
You cannot transmit 1 The microphone plug was not  
1 Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC  
connector has no foreign objects in it,  
then plug in the connector firmly.  
even though you  
inserted completely into the MIC  
connector.  
press Mic [PTT] or  
transmissions result 2 The Transmit Inhibit function is ON. 2 Change Menu No. 55 to OFF.  
38  
19  
in no contacts.  
3 CW or FSK was selected instead of 3 Press [MODE] to select a voice mode.  
a voice mode.  
4 The DSP TX filter bandwidth was  
inproperly selected.  
5 The wrong antenna connector  
(ANT 1 or ANT 2) was selected.  
4 Adjust the settings in Menu No. 20.  
38  
60  
5 Press [ATT/PRE/ ANT1/2] (1 s) to  
select the other antenna connector.  
85  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Page  
Ref.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Attempting to  
transmit results in  
the “HELLO”  
1 The antenna is not connected  
correctly.  
2 The impedances of the antenna and 2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna  
1 Check the antenna connection.  
Correct as necessary.  
2, 4  
2, 4  
message appearing  
and the reception  
mode being  
transceiver are not properly  
matched.  
3 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V  
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).  
4 The current rating of the DC power  
supply is not enough.  
system.  
3 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to  
16 V battery.  
2
3
restored.  
4 Use a DC power supply that has a  
current rating of more than 20.5 A at  
13.8 V DC. As for the TS-480HX,  
2 DC power supplies are required to  
transmit.  
The transceiver has 1 The microphone gain is set too low. 1 When in SSB or AM mode, increase  
27,  
28  
60  
low transmission  
power.  
the microphone gain.  
2 Poor antenna system connections  
are causing high SWR.  
2 Check the antenna connections.  
Confirm that the antenna tuner is  
reporting a low SWR.  
VOX does not  
operate.  
The VOX gain is set too low.  
Increase the VOX gain.  
36  
HF/ 50 MHz Linear 1 The linear amplifier control is OFF.  
amplifier does not  
1 Set Menu No. 28 (HF) or  
63  
77  
29 (50 MHz) to 1, 2, or 3.  
2 Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring  
and correct it as necessary.  
operate.  
2 The REMOTE connector wiring is  
wrong or faulty.  
The transceiver’s  
output power  
decreases after a  
short operating time.  
1 The air filters for the cooling fan(s)  
have been congested with dust.  
2 The cooling fan(s) cannot provide  
enough air flow to cool the  
1 Contact a KENWOOD authorized  
89  
service center to clean the filters.  
2 Relocate the transceiver so that air can 89  
easily flow through the TX/ RX unit to  
keep the unit cooled.  
transceiver down.  
You cannot access 1 Many repeaters require a subtone or 1 Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION” 31  
and use repeaters.  
1750 Hz tone to access.  
and select the correct frequency and  
type of subtone.  
2 Transmission and/ or reception  
frequency is wrong.  
2 You must transmit on the repeater’s  
input frequency and receive on the  
repeater’s output frequency. Refer to  
“FM REPEATER OPERATION”.  
31  
Digital operation  
1 Physical connections between the  
transceiver, computer, and TNC/ MCP  
is incorrect, or software settings in the  
TNC/ MCP are wrong.  
1 Re-check all connections using this  
manual, your TNC/ MCP manual, and  
your computer hardware manual as  
references.  
77,  
78  
results in few or no  
connects or contacts  
with other stations.  
2 Different transmission and reception 2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions  
35,  
37  
frequencies are being used.  
are switched OFF. Confirm that you  
are NOT operating split frequency.  
3 Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu  
No. 46 and 47, and level controls on  
your TNC/ MCP.  
3 The levels between the transceiver  
and the TNC/ MCP are incorrect.  
77,  
78  
4 Your transmitted signal or the  
4 Reorient/ relocate your antenna or  
increase your antenna gain.  
2, 4  
incoming receive signal is too weak.  
5 The TX delay time parameter in your 5 Set the TNC/ MCP TX delay time to  
TNC/ MCP was incorrectly set. more than 300 ms.  
1 Problem with the cable that connects 1 Check the cable and cable  
the PC to the TS-480HX/ SAT. connections.  
Attempts at  
controlling the  
76  
67  
transceiver with the 2 Communication parameters set in your 2 Use the same parameters in the  
computer have  
failed.  
terminal program do not match the  
transceiver parameters.  
terminal program and the transceiver.  
Check Menu No. 56.  
86  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Page  
Ref.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
“TEMP–HI” appears A sensor in the transceiver detected  
Stop transmitting and let the transceiver  
cool down for a while. Contact a  
KENWOOD authorized service center to  
clean the internal air filters.  
and “CHECK” in  
high temperature.  
Morse code sounds.  
“PA ERROR” and  
A sensor in the transceiver detected  
Let the transceiver cool down for a while,  
88  
“CHECK” in Morse malfunctions in the TX power amplifier then perform the Full reset. If the problem  
code sounds, then  
the transmission  
stops (TS-480HX  
only).  
circuit.  
persists, contact a KENWOOD authorized  
service center for repairs.  
“RX ONLY” appears 1 The DC cable is not connected to  
and “CHECK” in the DC-2 connector.  
Morse code sounds 2 The voltage difference between the 2 Confirm that the output DC voltage of  
1 Apply (or connect) the DC power  
source to the DC-2 connector.  
2, 3  
2, 3  
(TS-480HX only).  
DC-1 and DC-2 connectors on the  
transceiver is greater than 1.0 V DC.  
both DC power supplies is 13.8 V DC.  
The difference must be within 1.0 V  
DC.  
“DC ERROR”  
appears and  
The voltage of the DC power supply(s) Adjust the DC power supply voltage to  
3
is too high.  
13.8 V DC.  
“CHECK” in Morse  
code sounds.  
Transmission  
suddenly stops.  
1 The voltage difference between  
DC-1 and DC-2 connectors on the  
transceiver becomes greater than  
1.0 V DC.  
1 Confirm that the output DC voltage of  
both DC power supplies is 13.8 V DC.  
The difference must be within 1.0 V  
DC.  
2, 3  
2 The voltage of the DC power  
supply(s) is too high.  
2 Adjust the DC power supply voltage to  
13.8 V DC.  
3
3 Two different type of DC cables are 3 Use same type of DC cables.  
used.  
2, 3  
“VGS ERR”  
appears.  
An internal error occurred in the VGS-1. Confirm the connector of VGS-1 is  
securely connected to the transceiver.  
83,  
88  
Perform the Full reset. If the problem  
persists, contact a KENWOOD authorized  
service center for repairs.  
A message cannot There is a communication error  
be recorded/ played between the transceiver and VGS-1.  
back or no  
announcement can  
be heard.  
Confirm the connector of VGS-1 is  
securely connected to the transceiver.  
Perform the Full reset. If the problem  
persists, contact a KENWOOD authorized  
service center for repairs.  
83,  
88  
The transceiver  
output power seems measure the average RF power. So,  
to be low in SSB  
mode.  
Most of the external RF power meters  
Apply a continuous single tone (1 kHz) to  
the microphone audio input to measure  
the RF output power. The PEP will be the  
same as this RF output level.  
the meter reading is low when you  
operate and talk in SSB mode.  
The LCD meter used in the TS-480 has  
relatively fast response time but it is not  
fast enough to measure the accurate  
PEP (peak envelope power).  
87  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
MICROPROCESSOR RESET  
DEMONSTRATION MODE  
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,  
resetting the microprocessor default settings may  
resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting  
the microprocessor of the TS-480 transceiver: Partial  
Reset and Full Reset.  
The transceiver can be configured to enter the  
demonstration mode for display purposes. To enter  
the demonstration mode:  
1 Switch the transceiver OFF.  
2 Press [MENU/ F.LOCK]+[ ] to switch the  
transceiver ON.  
INITIAL SETTINGS  
The display brightness changes, the LED turns  
ON/ OFF, and alpha-numeric segments turn  
ON/ OFF automatically.  
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating  
frequency and mode are as follows:  
If you operate the transceiver while in the  
demonstration mode, the demonstration is  
temporarily paused. But, if no operation is  
performed for more than 10 seconds, the  
demonstration starts again.  
VFO A:  
VFO B:  
14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels  
have no data stored.  
3 To exit the demonstration mode, first turn the  
transceiver OFF, then press  
PARTIAL RESET  
[MENU/ F.LOCK]+[ ] to turn the transceiver ON.  
Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not  
function according to the instructions in this manual.  
The following data is NOT erased by performing a  
Partial Reset.  
Note: You cannot exit the demonstration mode by simply switching  
the transceiver OFF. You must switch the transceiver OFF then press  
[MENU/ F.LOCK]+[  
] to turn the transceiver ON in order to exit the  
demonstration mode.  
Memory channel data  
Menu settings  
Antenna tuner preset data  
ANT 1/ ANT 2 selection data  
Frequency and mode data for the Auto Mode  
function  
Various adjustment setting values  
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B / M/V]+[ ].  
A confirmation message appears when performing  
the Partial Reset. Press [A/B / M/V] to proceed.  
Otherwise, press any other key to cancel the  
Partial Reset and return to normal operation.  
The VFOs reset to the factory default values.  
FULL RESET  
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data  
in all the memory channels. In addition, this function  
resets all the settings that you customized, to the  
factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner  
preset data, etc.).  
Reset the transceiver by pressing  
[A=B/ SPLIT]+[ ].  
A confirmation message appears when performing  
Full Reset. Press [A=B/ SPLIT] to proceed.  
Otherwise, press any other key to cancel the Full  
Reset and return to normal operation.  
When you perform the Full Reset:  
All frequencies, modes, memory data, adjustment  
values, and AT preset data are set to the factory  
default values.  
88  
16 TROUBLESHOOTING  
OPERATION NOTICES  
The transceiver has been designed and engineered  
to avoid possible hardware glitches. However, you  
may notice the following symptoms when you operate  
the transceiver. These symptoms are not  
malfunctions.  
DC POWER SUPPLY  
As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS {page 91}, this  
transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of  
13.8 V ±15%. If you find that the transceiver cannot  
be switched ON, or that it shuts OFF automatically,  
the DC voltage may be outside the specified range.  
In such a case, remove the DC cable from the  
transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied  
voltage is within the specified range.  
FAN NOISES  
When the TX/ RX unit is installed in a non-ventilated  
area, the cooling fan(s) may increase in speed and  
emit a high level of noise for a long time. This is  
because the TX/ RX unit cannot be cooled down with  
the regular fan speed. In this case, relocate the TX/  
RX unit so that air can easily flow through the TX/ RX  
unit to keep the unit cooled.  
INTERNAL BEATS  
On some spots of the receiver frequencies, the  
S-meter moves or you cannot receive any signals.  
This is inevitable when you use superheterodyne  
receivers. You may notice the signals on the  
following spots of the frequency.  
15.600.00 MHz, 31.200.00 MHz, 46.800.00 MHz  
AGC  
When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 35}, the  
receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,  
decrease the RF gain, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or  
turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF gain must  
be greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF.  
60 m BAND OPERATION (K-TYPE/ U. S. A. ONLY)  
Effective from July 3, 2003, FCC Report and Order  
(R&O) in ET Docket 02-98 granted US amateurs  
secondary access to five discrete channels in the  
vicinity of 5 MHz. General, Advanced, and Amateur  
Extra licensees may use the following five channels  
on a secondary basis with a maximum effective  
radiated power of 50 W PEP relative to a half wave  
dipole. Only upper sideband suppressed carrier voice  
transmissions may be used. The frequencies are  
5330.5, 5346.5, 5366.5, 5371.5 and 5403.5 kHz. The  
occupied bandwidth is limited to 2.8 kHz centered on  
5332, 5348, 5368, 5373, and 5405 kHz respectively.  
The TS-480 transceiver stops at this new 60 m band  
as you scroll up or down amateur radio frequency  
bands. For more information, contact ARRL or  
search their Web site (http://www.arrl.org) with a key  
word, “60 meter”.  
89  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
ARCP-480/ ARHP-10  
HS-5  
HS-6  
LF-30A  
Remote control software  
Delux Headphones  
Small Headphones  
Low-pass Filter  
Refer to page 68 for details.  
TS-480SAT only  
MC-43S  
MC-47  
MC-60A  
MJ-88  
Microphone  
Multi-function Microphone Desk-top Microphone  
Plug adaptor  
(8-pin metal to RJ45)  
MJ-88 is required.  
MJ-88 is required.  
MJ-88 is required.  
PG-20  
PG-4Z  
PS-53  
SO-3  
DC cable (7 m/ 23 ft)  
Extension cable kit  
(4 m/ 13 ft)  
Regulated DC Power  
Supply (22.5 A)  
TCXO unit  
SP-50B  
SP-23  
VGS-1  
YF-107CN  
Mobile Speaker  
External Speaker  
Voice Guide and Storage  
unit  
270 Hz IF filter  
YF-107C  
YF-107SN  
500 Hz IF filter  
1.8 kHz IF filter  
90  
SPECIFICATIONS  
TS-480SAT  
TS-480HX  
General  
J3E (LSB, USB)/ A1A (CW)/ A3E (AM)/ F3E (FM)/  
F1B (FSK)  
Mode  
Number of memory channels  
Antenna impedance 160 m ~ 6 m band  
100 + 10 (Quick memory channels)  
50 (with built-in antenna  
50 Ω  
tuner 16.7 ~ 150 )  
Supply Voltage  
DC 13.8 V ±15%  
Grounding method  
Negative ground  
Transmit (max.)  
Receive (no signal)  
20.5 A or less  
41.0 A or less  
Current  
1.5 A or less  
Usable temperature range  
–20°C ~ 60°C (–4°F ~ 140°F)  
Within ±5 ppm  
–10°C ~ 50°C  
–20°C ~ 60°C  
Frequency stability  
without SO-3  
Within ±10 ppm  
Within ±0.5 ppm  
Within ±1.0 ppm  
–10°C ~ 50°C  
Frequency stability  
with SO-3  
–20°C ~ 60°C  
Dimensions  
TX/ RX unit  
179 x 69.5 x 278 mm/ 7" x 2 3/4" x 10 15/16"  
183 x 78 x 68 mm/ 7 3/16" x 3" x 2 5/8"  
Approx. 3.2 kg/ 7 lbs  
(W x H x D  
Remote Control panel  
TX/ RX unit  
Projections included)  
Weight  
Remote Control panel  
Approx. 0.5 kg/ 1 lb 2 oz  
TS-480SAT  
TS-480HX  
Transmitter  
160 m band  
80 m band  
60 m band  
40 m band  
30 m band  
20 m band  
17 m band  
15 m band  
12 m band  
10 m band  
6 m band  
1.8 ~ 2.0 MHz (K-type) 1.81 ~ 2.0 MHz (E-type)  
3.5 ~ 4.0 MHz (K-type) 3.5 ~ 3.8 MHz (E-type)  
5.25 ~ 5.45 MHz (K-type)  
7.0 ~ 7.3 MHz (K-type) 7.0 ~ 7.1 MHz (E-type)  
10.1 ~ 10.15 MHz  
Frequency range  
14.0 ~ 14.35 MHz  
18.068 ~ 18.168 MHz  
21.0 ~ 21.45 MHz  
24.89 ~ 24.99 MHz  
28.0 ~ 29.7 MHz  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz (K-type) 50.0 ~ 52.0 MHz (E-type)  
200 W (160 m ~ 10 m band)  
Max. 100 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
Min. 5 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
Max. 25 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ FM  
100 W (6 m band)  
5 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
50 W (160 m ~ 10 m band)  
25 W (6 m band)  
Output power  
Modulation  
AM  
Min. 5 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
5 W (160 m ~ 6 m band)  
SSB  
FM  
Balanced  
Phase  
AM  
Low level  
91  
20 SPECIFICATIONS  
TS-480SAT  
–50 dB or less  
TS-480HX  
Transmitter  
160 m ~ 10 m band  
6 m band  
Spurious emissions  
–60 dB or less  
40 dB or more  
Carrier suppression (SSB)  
Unwanted sideband suppression  
(modulation frequency 1.0 kHz)  
40 dB or more  
Wide  
±5 kHz or less  
±2.5 kHz or less  
±9.99 kHz  
Maximum frequency  
deviation (FM)  
Narrow  
XIT shift frequency range  
Microphone impedance  
600  
TS-480SAT  
TS-480HX  
Receiver  
Circuit type  
SSB/ CW/ AM/ FSK: Double conv. superheterodyne  
FM: Triple conversion superheterodyne  
Frequency range  
0.05 ~ 59.999.999 MHz  
1st IF: 73.095 MHz  
Intermediate Frequency (IF)  
2nd IF: 10.695 MHz  
3rd IF (FM only): 455 kHz  
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 4 µV or less  
1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz: 0.2 µV or less  
24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.13 µV or less  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.13 µV or less  
SSB/ CW/ FSK  
(S/N 10 dB)  
Sensitivity  
Selectivity  
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 31.6 µV or less  
1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz: 2.0 µV or less  
24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz: 1.3 µV or less  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 1.3 µV or less  
AM  
(S/N 10 dB)  
FM  
28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.22 µV or less  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.22 µV or less  
(12 dB SINAD)  
SSB  
AM  
FM  
–6 dB: 2.4 kHz or more, –60 dB: 4.4 kHz or less  
–6 dB: 5.0 kHz or more, –60 dB: 40.0 kHz or less  
–6 dB: 12.0 kHz or more, –50 dB: 25.0 kHz or less  
70 dB or more  
Image rejection  
1st IF rejection  
70 dB or more  
Beat Cancel attenuation (at 1 kHz)  
RIT shift frequency range  
40 dB or more  
±9.99 kHz  
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 18.0 µV or less  
1.8 ~ 30.0 MHz: 1.8 µV or less  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 1.1 µV or less  
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM  
Squelch sensitivity  
28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.2 µV or less  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.2 µV or less  
FM  
Audio output (8 , 10% distortion)  
2.0 W or more  
Audio output impedance (EXT.SP)  
8 Ω  
92  
INDEX  
AF Gain ...................................... 18  
AGC ......................................35, 89  
AM  
DSP  
Beat Cancel ........................... 47  
REMOTE connector ............... 77  
Lock Function ............................. 63  
Frequency.............................. 63  
Tuning control ........................ 63  
Lockout, Memory Channel .......... 54  
LSB (see SSB)  
Changing the Filter Bandwidth  
.............................................. 45  
DSP Filters............................. 46  
Beat Cancel 1 ........................ 47  
Beat Cancel 2 ........................ 47  
NR1 ....................................... 47  
NR2 ....................................... 47  
RX Monitor............................. 48  
Electric Keyer.............................. 39  
Auto Weighting ...................... 39  
Bug Key Function .................. 40  
Changing Keying Speed ........ 39  
Messages, Checking.............. 40  
Messages, Storing ................. 40  
Messages, Transmitting ......... 40  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio  
.............................................. 39  
Swap Dot and Dash Paddle  
Narrow Bandwidth for............. 28  
Transmission ......................... 28  
Amplifier, HF/ 50 MHz Linear Amp.  
REMOTE connector ............... 77  
AMTOR ...................................... 43  
Antenna  
ANT 1/ ANT 2......................... 60  
Connection .......................... 2, 4  
Antenna Tuner ............................ 60  
Anti-VOX Adjustment .................. 36  
Attenuator ..............................49, 61  
Automatic Antenna Tuner .......60, 78  
Presetting .............................. 61  
External Antenna Tuner Type  
.............................................. 61  
Automatic Gain Control ............... 35  
Auto CW TX in SSB Mode .......... 41  
Auto Mode .................................. 61  
Auto Zero-Beat ........................... 29  
A=B ............................................ 35  
Backup Battery ........................... 83  
Band, Selecting a ........................ 19  
Beat Cancel ................................ 47  
Beep Function............................. 62  
Break-in, Full/ Semi ..................... 39  
Bug Key Function........................ 40  
Carrier-Operated Mode ............... 58  
Cleaning ..................................... 83  
Clover ......................................... 43  
COM Connector .......................... 15  
Computer .................................... 76  
Computer Control  
MCP and TNC ............................ 78  
Memory  
Channel Name....................... 54  
Conventional .......................... 50  
Erasing, Channels.................. 54  
Group .................................... 59  
Lockout, Channel ................... 54  
Quick, Recalling Channels ..... 55  
Quick, Storing into.................. 55  
Quick, Transfers to VFO......... 55  
Recall .................................... 51  
Recall and Scroll .................... 51  
Resetting ............................... 88  
Scanning, All-Channel ............ 58  
Scroll ..................................... 52  
Start/ End Frequencies .......... 53  
Storing Data in ....................... 50  
Temporary Frequency Changes  
.........................................52, 55  
Transfer, To Memory .............. 52  
Transfer, To VFOs .................. 52  
Memory Scan ............................. 58  
Menu .......................................... 22  
Access ................................... 22  
Alphabetical Function List ...... 26  
Configuration ......................... 23  
What is a................................ 22  
Meter .......................................... 20  
MHz Key, Using .......................... 34  
Microphone  
Position.................................. 41  
External Antenna Tuner..........60, 78  
External Speakers................... 6, 90  
FAX/ Facsimile ............................ 44  
Fine Tuning ................................. 35  
FM  
CTCSS Operation .................. 33  
Narrow Bandwidth for............. 28  
Repeater Operation ............... 31  
Tone Function ........................ 32  
Transmission ......................... 27  
TX Deviation .......................... 28  
Frequency  
Correction for CW .................. 41  
Direct, Entry ........................... 34  
Fine Tuning ............................ 35  
Lock....................................... 63  
Rounding ...................................  
Selecting your ........................ 34  
Step Size ............................... 34  
FSK .............................. (see RTTY)  
Full Break-in................................ 39  
Full Reset ................................... 88  
Fuses, Replacing .......................... 5  
Gain  
AF.......................................... 18  
RF ......................................... 18  
G-TOR ........................................ 43  
Headphones (PHONES) ............... 7  
IF Filter  
Connector (MIC) .................... 15  
Gain....................................... 21  
PF Keys ................................. 64  
Mode, Selecting a ....................... 19  
Monitor, RX ................................. 64  
Noise Blanker ............................. 47  
Noise Reduction ......................... 47  
Normal Scan ............................... 56  
Optional Accessories................... 90  
Installation ............................. 81  
PacketCluster Tune................72, 79  
Packet Radio .........................43, 48  
PacTOR...................................... 43  
Partial Reset ............................... 88  
PF Key........................................ 64  
Pitch, Frequency ......................... 29  
Power  
Connector (COM) .............15, 76  
Setting up .............................. 67  
Crossband Repeater ..............71, 79  
CTCSS  
Freq. ID Scan......................... 33  
CW  
Auto TX in SSB Mode ............ 41  
Break-in, Full.......................... 39  
Break-in, Semi ....................... 39  
Frequency Correction for........ 41  
Key jack ................................... 7  
Message Memory .................. 40  
Pitch ...................................... 29  
Reverse (Reception) .............. 49  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio  
Bandwidth Change ................ 45  
Shift ....................................... 45  
Internal Beats.............................. 89  
Key Jack (PADDLE/ KEY) ............. 7  
Keyer, Electronic  
.............................................. 39  
Sidetone, TX .......................... 29  
Sidetone, Volume ................... 29  
Transmission ......................... 29  
Zero Beat, Auto ...................... 29  
Data Communication DSP Filter  
.............................................. 48  
DATA Connector ....................15, 78  
Demonstration Mode................... 88  
Direct Frequency Entry ............... 34  
Display  
Connecting DC  
Supply Connection ................... 3  
Switching ON/OFF ................. 18  
TX.......................................... 65  
Voltage .................................. 89  
Pre-amplifier ............................... 49  
Program Scan ............................. 56  
Partially Slowed ..................... 57  
Programmable  
Auto Weighting ...................... 39  
Bug Key Function .................. 40  
Changing Keying Speed ........ 39  
Insert Keying .......................... 41  
Messages, Checking.............. 40  
Messages, Storing ................. 40  
Messages, Transmitting ......... 40  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio. 39  
Key Illumination........................... 63  
LCD ........................... (See Display)  
Lightening Protection .................... 4  
Linear Amplifier  
Brightness.............................. 63  
Key Illumination ..................... 63  
LCD ..................................13, 14  
DNL (Digital Noise Limiter) .......... 47  
Key ....................... (See PF Key)  
VFO ....................................... 54  
PSK31 ...................................43, 48  
Quick Data Transfer  
Compatible Equipment ........... 79  
Control ................................... 63  
93  
19 INDEX  
Connections........................... 79  
USB ............................... (see SSB)  
VFO  
Equipment, Needed ..........66, 79  
Using ..................................... 66  
Quick Menu  
Equalizing (A=B) .................... 35  
Programmable ....................... 54  
Scan ...................................... 56  
Selecting A or B ..................... 18  
VGS-1 Voice Guide and Storage  
Unit (optional) ........................68, 81  
Announcement Speed ........... 71  
Announcement Volume .......... 71  
Checking Messages............... 69  
Constant Recording ............... 69  
Erasing a Recorded  
Message ................................ 69  
Installation ............................. 81  
Interval Time, Changing ......... 69  
Message Playback ................. 69  
Message Playback Volume .... 69  
Recording Messages ............. 68  
Sending Messages ................ 69  
VOICE1 ................................. 70  
VOICE2 ................................. 70  
Voice Guide ........................... 70  
Volume  
Programming the ................... 22  
Using the ............................... 22  
Quick QSY .................................. 34  
Radio Teletypewriting ....(See RTTY)  
Reference Frequency Calibration  
.............................................. 82  
Repeater Operation .................... 31  
Reset  
Full ........................................ 88  
Partial .................................... 88  
RF Gain ...................................... 18  
RIT ............................................. 35  
RTTY  
Operation .............................. 77  
Tone ...................................... 42  
RX DSP Equalizer....................... 64  
RX Monitor.................................. 64  
RX Pitch Frequency .................... 29  
Scan  
AF Gain ................................. 18  
RF Gain ................................. 18  
VOX (Voice-Operated Transmit)  
Delay Time............................. 36  
Microphone Input Level .......... 36  
XIT.............................................. 37  
Zero-Beat, Auto........................... 29  
All-Channel ............................ 58  
Carrier-Operated mode .......... 58  
Group .................................... 59  
Group Select .......................... 59  
Hold ....................................... 57  
Memory, Group ...................... 59  
Program................................. 56  
Resume Method .................... 58  
Time-Operated mode ............. 58  
Semi Break-in ............................. 39  
Sidetone  
60 m Band Operation .................. 89  
Changing, the Volume ............ 29  
Pitch .......(See Pitch, Frequency)  
Sky Command II ....................73, 80  
Slow Scan TV ...............(See SSTV)  
SO-3 ........................................... 81  
Specifications.............................. 91  
Speech Processor....................... 37  
Split-Frequency Operation .......... 30  
Squelch, Adjusting ...................... 19  
SSB, Transmission...................... 27  
SSTV .......................................... 44  
TF-SET ....................................... 30  
Time-Operated Mode .................. 58  
Time-out Timer ............................ 65  
Tone  
Activating the Function ........... 32  
Frequency ID Scan ................ 32  
Selecting a, Frequency .......... 32  
Transmitting a ........................ 32  
1750 Hz ................................. 32  
Tuning control Adjustment Rate  
.............................................. 35  
Transmit Inhibit ........................... 38  
Transmission ............. 20, 27~29, 36  
Transverter ................................. 65  
Troubleshooting .......................... 84  
TX Equalizer ............................... 38  
TX Filter Bandwidth ..................... 38  
TX Monitor .................................. 65  
TX Power ...............................20, 65  
TX/ RX Unit............................15, 16  
TX Tune ...................................... 66  
94  
ADDENDUM  
This supplement provides information not available at the time the instruction manual was  
printed and/or corrects erroneous information appearing in the instruction manual.  
Pages 71 and 79 < CROSSBAND REPTEATER >:  
Pege 71: 6 Press [MENU/ F. LOCK] on the TS-480, then turn MULTI control to access Menu Nos. 57  
and 58.  
7 Press [  
] to select “on”.  
Pege 79: After connecting the 2 transceivers with the cable, access Menu No. 57 (DTS polarity) and 58  
(Busy lockout) on the TS-480 transceiver and select “on”.  
Note: On the TM-D700, use the transmission (TX) band for both the transmission and reception frequencies.  
Page 91 < SPECIFICATIONS >:  
The 7 MHz band transmission range is expanded to "7.0 MHz - 7.2 MHz" for the TS-480HX E and TS-  
480SAT E (European models).  
SUPPLÉMENT  
Ce supplément contient des informations qui n’étaient pas disponibles au moment de  
l’impression du mode d’emploi et/ou corrige des informations erronées contenues dans ce mode  
d’emploi.  
Pages 71 et 79 < RÉPÉTEUR À BANDES CROISÉES >:  
Pege 71: 6 Appuyez sur [MENU/ F.LOCK] sur le TS-480 et tournez la commande MULTI pour accéder  
au numéro 57 et 58 du menu.  
7 Appuyez sur [  
] pour sélectionner “on” (activée).  
Pege 79: Après avoir connecté les 2 émetteurs-récepteurs au moyen du câble, accédez au numéro 57  
(Polarité DTS) et 58 (Blocage si occupé (TX)) du menu sur le TS-480 pour sélectionner “on”  
(activé).  
Remarque: Sur le TM-D700, utilisez la bande de transmission (TX) pour les fréquences de transmission et de  
réception.  
Page 91 < FICHE TECHNIQUE >:  
La plage de transmission de la bande 7 MHz est étendue à "7,0 MHz - 7,2 MHz" pour le TS-480HX E et  
TS-480SAT E (modèles européens).  
SUPLEMENTO  
Este suplemento contiene información no disponible en la fecha que se imprimió el manual de  
instrucciones y/o corrige información errónea que aparecía en dicho manual.  
Pginas 71 y 79 < REPETIDOR DE BANDA CRUZADA >:  
Página 71:  
6
Pulse [MENU/ F.LOCK] en el TS-480, luego gire el control MULTI para acceder el Menú Nos 57 y 58.  
7
Pulse [  
] para seleccionar “on” (activado).  
Página 79: Luego de conectar los 2 transceptores con el cable, acceda al Menú Nos 57 (Polaridad DTS) y 58 (Bloqueo  
de ocupade (TX)) en el transceptor TS-480 y seleccione “on” (activado).  
Nota: En el TM-D700, utilice la banda de transmisión (TX) tanto para las frecuencias de transmisión como de recepción.  
Pgina 91 < ESPECIFICACIONES >:  
La gama de transmisión de la banda de 7 MHz se amplía a "7,0 MHz - 7,2 MHz" para los TS-480HX E y TS-  
480SAT E (modelos europeos).  
B59-2392-10  
SUPPLEMENTO  
Questo supplemento fornisce informazioni non disponibili quando è stato stampato il manuale di  
istruzioni e/o contiene correzioni su informazioni errate pubblicate sul manduale di istruzioni.  
Pagine 71 e 79 < RIPETITORE DI BANDA TRASVERSALE >:  
Pagina 71:  
6
Premere [MENU/ F.LOCK] sul TS-480, quindi ruotare il selettore MULTI per accedere al  
Menu N. 57 e 58.  
7
Premere [  
] per selezionare “on” (attivato).  
Pagina 79: Dopo aver collegato i 2 ricetrasmettitori con il cavo, accedere al Menu N. 57 (Polarità DTS)  
e 58 (Esclusione occupato (TX)) sul TS-480 e selezionare “on” (attivato).  
Nota: Nel TM-D700, utilizzare la banda di trasmissione (TX) sia per le frequenze di trasmissione che per quelle di  
ricezione.  
Pagina 91 < DATI TECNICI >:  
La gamme della banda di trasmissione 7 MHz viene esteso a "7,0 MHz - 7,2 MHz" per la serie TS-480HX  
E e TS-480SAT E (modelli europei).  
NACHRAG  
Dieser Nachtrag enthält Informationen, die zum Zeitpunkt der Drucklegung der  
Bedienungsanleitung noch nicht verfügbar waren, und/oder Korrekturen für fehlerhafte  
Informationen in der Bedienungsanleitung.  
Seiten 71 und 79 < CROSSBAND-UMSETZER >:  
Seite 71: 6 Drücken Sie [MENU/ F.LOCK] auf dem TS-480, und drehen Sie dann den MULTI-Regler zur  
Auswahl des Menüs Nr. 57 und 58.  
7 Drücken Sie [  
], um “on” (Ein) auszuwählen.  
Seite 79: Nach dem Verbinden der beiden Transceiver mit dem Kabel gehen Sie am Transceiver TS-480  
in das Menü Nr. 57 (DTS-Polarität) und 58 (Sperre bei Singnalempfang (Senden)) und wählen  
Sie “on” (Ein).  
Hinweis: Verwenden Sie beim TM-D700 das Übertragungsband (TX) für die Sende- und Empfangsfrequenz.  
Seite 91 < TECHNISCHE DATEN >:  
Bei den Modellen TS-480HX E und TS-480SAT E (Europa-Modelle) ist der Übertragungsbereich des 7-  
MHz-Bands auf "7,0 MHz - 7,2 MHz" erweitert.  
TOEVOEGSEL  
Deze bijlage bevat informatie die niet beschikbaar was ten tijde van de druk van de  
gebruiksaanwijzing en/of gecorrigeerde informatie die foutief is opgenomen in dezelfde  
gebruiksaanwijzing.  
Pagina’s 71 en 79 < KRUISBAND-REPEATER >:  
Pagina 71:  
6
Druk op [MENU/ F. LOCK] op de TS-480 en draai daarna de MULTI-regelaar om  
Menunummer 57 en 58 te openen.  
7
Druk op [  
] en kies “on” (Aan).  
Pagina 79: Nadat u de 2 transceivers met behulp van de kabel op elkaar hebt aangesloten, opent u  
Menunummer 57 (DTS-polariteit) en 58 (Kanaal-bezet-blokkering (TX)) op de TS-480 trans  
ceiver en kiest u de instelling “on” (Aan).  
Opmarking: Op de TM-D700 gebruikt u de zendfrequentieband (TX) voor zowel de zend- als ontvangstfrequenties.  
Pagina 91 < TECNISCHE GEGEVENS >:  
Het zendbereik voor de 7 MHz band is uitgebreid tot "7,0 MHz – 7,2 MHz" voor de TS-480HX E en TS-  
480SAT E (Europese modellen).  

RCA EZ3000BK User Manual
Raypak XFYRE 300 User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio Car Stereo System CDR83MP User Manual
Pentax Camcorder PC 330 User Manual
Pelco Camera Accessories EH4010 User Manual
Panasonic DVCPRO VTR AJ HD1700 User Manual
Panasonic Camera Accessories AG100 User Manual
Newcon Optik NIGHT VISION RIFLE SCOPE DN 140 User Manual
Magnadyne M9900CDS User Manual
Kenwood KDC C712 User Manual